14.07.2013 Views

Installation and commissioning manual 1060 - Documentation CN

Installation and commissioning manual 1060 - Documentation CN

Installation and commissioning manual 1060 - Documentation CN

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

NUM <strong>1060</strong><br />

INSTALLATION AND<br />

COMMISSIONING<br />

MANUAL<br />

0101938816/5-E1<br />

10-97 en-938816/5-E1


Despite the care taken in the preparation of this document, NUM cannot guarantee the accuracy of the information it contains <strong>and</strong> cannot be held<br />

responsible for any errors therein, nor for any damage which might result from the use or application of the document.<br />

The physical, technical <strong>and</strong> functional characteristics of the hardware <strong>and</strong> software products <strong>and</strong> the services described in this document are subject<br />

to modification <strong>and</strong> cannot under any circumstances be regarded as contractual.<br />

The programming examples described in this <strong>manual</strong> are intended for guidance only. They must be specially adapted before they can be used in<br />

programs with an industrial application, according to the automated system used <strong>and</strong> the safety levels required.<br />

© Copyright NUM 1997.<br />

All rights reserved. No part of this <strong>manual</strong> may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means whatsoever, including photographic or magnetic<br />

processes. The transcription on an electronic machine of all or part of the contents is forbidden.<br />

© Copyright NUM 1997 software <strong>CN</strong>C NUM <strong>1060</strong>.<br />

This software is the property of NUM. Each memorized copy of this software sold confers upon the purchaser a non-exclusive licence strictly limited<br />

to the use of the said copy. No copy or other form of duplication of this product is authorized.<br />

2 en-938816/5


Table of contents<br />

Table of contents<br />

This executive summary includes only the level 1 <strong>and</strong> 2 titles. A complete table of contents is given at the beginning<br />

of each chapter.<br />

Part One: <strong>Installation</strong><br />

1 General <strong>Installation</strong> Instructions 1 - 1<br />

1.1 Operating Conditions 1 - 3<br />

1.2 System Power Consumption 1 - 4<br />

1.3 System Cooling 1 - 5<br />

1.4 Interconnections 1 - 6<br />

1.5 Colours of the NUM <strong>1060</strong> Operator Panels 1 - 15<br />

1.6 Screen Saver 1 - 15<br />

2 General System Description 2 - 1<br />

2.1 System Components 2 - 3<br />

2.2 Basic Configuration 2 - 8<br />

2.3 Multipanel Configuration 2 - 8<br />

2.4 Multi-<strong>CN</strong>C Configuration 2 - 9<br />

2.5 Multirack Configurations 2 - 9<br />

2.6 System Architecture 2 - 10<br />

3 Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong> 3 - 1<br />

3.1 QWERTY 14" Colour Operator Panel 3 - 3<br />

3.2 50-Key Panels 3 - 6<br />

3.3 Compact Panel 3 - 12<br />

3.4 Multiplexer Module 3 - 15<br />

3.5 Card Racks 3 - 18<br />

3.6 Machine Panel 3 - 24<br />

3.7 Additional Components 3 - 26<br />

4 System Component Preparation 4 - 1<br />

4.1 Rack Preparation 4 - 3<br />

4.2 Preparing the Compact Panel 4 - 12<br />

4.3 Machine Panel Preparation 4 - 15<br />

4.4 General Operations 4 - 20<br />

5 Interconnections 5 - 1<br />

5.1 <strong>CN</strong>C/Peripheral Interconnections 5 - 3<br />

5.2 Operator Panel 5 - 8<br />

5.3 Multiplexer Module 5 - 15<br />

5.4 Rack Interconnections 5 - 16<br />

5.5 Machine Panel Interconnections 5 - 22<br />

5.6 NUM Diskette Drive 5 - 28<br />

en-938816/5 3


6 Cards 6 - 1<br />

6.1 Power Supply Cards 6 - 5<br />

6.2 <strong>1060</strong> Series II CPU 6 - 7<br />

6.3 <strong>1060</strong> Series I Processor 6 - 11<br />

6.4 CPU Cards 6 - 12<br />

6.5 Incremental <strong>and</strong> Absolute Axis<br />

Measurement Card 6 - 24<br />

6.6 IT/Serial Line Card 6 - 32<br />

6.7 Analogue Input/Output Card 6 - 34<br />

6.8 32-24 I/O <strong>and</strong> 64-48 I/O Cards 6 - 36<br />

6.9 32-Input/24-Output Card 6 - 42<br />

6.10 32-Input Interface Modules 6 - 46<br />

6.11 24-Output Relay Modules 6 - 50<br />

6.12 32-Input Card 6 - 56<br />

6.13 32-Output Card 6 - 59<br />

7 Cables 7 - 1<br />

7.1 Communication Cables 7 - 5<br />

7.2 Axis Cables 7 - 17<br />

7.3 Analogue I/O, Interrupt <strong>and</strong> Timer Cables 7 - 44<br />

7.4 Input <strong>and</strong> Output Cables 7 - 56<br />

7.5 Power Cables 7 - 72<br />

7.6 Video Cable 7 - 76<br />

Part Two: Commissioning<br />

8 Initial Operation 8 - 1<br />

9 Load <strong>and</strong> Check of the PLC Programme 9 - 1<br />

9.1 Load Procedures 9 - 1<br />

9.2 Checking the PLC Programme: Test of the<br />

Safety Systems 9 - 1<br />

10 Integration of the Machine Parameters (by UT5) 10 - 1<br />

11 Axis Calibration (by UT2) 11 - 1<br />

11.1 General 11 - 3<br />

11.2 Record of Corrections to Be Made 11 - 5<br />

11.3 Operations on Axis Measurement<br />

Correction Tables 11 - 6<br />

12 Interaxis Calibration 12 - 1<br />

12.1 General Description of Interaxis<br />

Calibration 12 - 3<br />

12.2 Interaxis Calibration by Utility 20 12 - 7<br />

12.3 Dynamic Interaxis Calibration 12 - 13<br />

13 Final Inspection 13 - 1<br />

4 en-938816/5


Date Index Description<br />

12 - 91 0 Document creation<br />

12 - 92 1 Inclusion of Series II<br />

Inclusion of new components:<br />

- 9" <strong>and</strong> 10" operator panels<br />

- machine panel<br />

- 2-slot extension rack<br />

- 32-input interfacing module<br />

- 24-output relay module<br />

- IT card - Serial lines<br />

03 - 94 2 Inclusion of the analogue 8-input/8-output card<br />

Miscellaneous corrections<br />

08 - 94 3 Inclusion of utility 20<br />

Miscellaneous corrections<br />

04 - 96 4 Inclusion of new components:<br />

- version 2 machine processor<br />

- UC SII CPU<br />

- 32-24 <strong>and</strong> 64-48 I/O cards<br />

- 32-input or 32-output cards with LMI connectors<br />

- compact panel<br />

- new 32-input interfacing module<br />

- new 24-output relay module<br />

- axis interface module<br />

- NUM diskette drive<br />

Inclusion of axes with absolute measurement<br />

Record of Revisions<br />

Revisions of the <strong>Documentation</strong><br />

en-938816/5-E1 5


Date Index Description<br />

04 - 97 5 Inclusion of new components:<br />

- version 2 <strong>CN</strong>C processor<br />

- NUM keyboard<br />

- 50-key keyboard with LCD screen<br />

6 en-938816/5-E1<br />

Improvement of existing components<br />

Miscellaneous corrections <strong>and</strong> additional information.<br />

10 - 97 5 - E1 Additional information on operating conditions<br />

Modified cable shielding connection to connector plug covers<br />

Modified multiplexer module mounting recommendations<br />

Modified 50-key LCD panel power cable


NUM <strong>1060</strong> <strong>Documentation</strong> Structure<br />

User Documents<br />

These documents are designed for use of the <strong>CN</strong>C.<br />

NUM<br />

OPERATOR<br />

MANUAL<br />

M / W<br />

938821<br />

Integrator Documents<br />

NUM<br />

OPERATOR<br />

MANUAL<br />

T / G<br />

938822<br />

NUM<br />

PROGRAMMING<br />

MANUAL<br />

M<br />

These documents are designed for setting up the <strong>CN</strong>C on a machine.<br />

NUM <strong>1060</strong><br />

INSTALLATION<br />

AND<br />

COMMISSIONING<br />

MANUAL<br />

938816<br />

NUM<br />

PARAMETER<br />

MANUAL<br />

938818<br />

NUM<br />

938819<br />

AUTOMATIC<br />

CONTROL<br />

FUNCTION<br />

PROGRAMMING<br />

MANUAL<br />

LADDER LANGUAGE<br />

938846<br />

NUM<br />

PROGRAMMING<br />

MANUAL<br />

T<br />

938820<br />

Foreword<br />

Foreword<br />

en-938816/4 7


List of NUM <strong>1060</strong> Utilities<br />

A series of utilities are available for the NUM <strong>1060</strong> <strong>CN</strong>Cs for integration <strong>and</strong> use of the systems.<br />

These utilities may be included in the basic version or available as options.<br />

Depending on the function performed by each utility, its use is described in the integration <strong>manual</strong> or operator <strong>manual</strong>,<br />

as appropriate.<br />

The table below lists the utilities <strong>and</strong> gives the references of the document describing them:<br />

Utility Name Manual Chapter<br />

UT2 axis calibration installation <strong>and</strong> <strong>commissioning</strong> <strong>manual</strong>s (938 816) 10<br />

UT3 resident macros operator <strong>manual</strong>s (938 821 <strong>and</strong> 938 822) 8<br />

UT5 parameter integration parameter <strong>manual</strong> (938 818) 12<br />

UT7 programme debugging automatic control function programming <strong>manual</strong> - 16<br />

Ladder Language (938 946)<br />

UT12 option locking operator <strong>manual</strong>s (938 821 <strong>and</strong> 938 822) 8<br />

UT20 interaxis calibration installation <strong>and</strong> <strong>commissioning</strong> <strong>manual</strong> (938 816) 11<br />

UT22 integration of axis parameters SETTOOL Manual (938 924) 8<br />

8 en-938816/4


<strong>Installation</strong> <strong>and</strong> Commissioning Manual<br />

This <strong>manual</strong> includes two parts:<br />

- installation: physical integration of the numerical control with the machine <strong>and</strong> its environment,<br />

- <strong>commissioning</strong>: adaptation of the <strong>CN</strong>C to the machine configuration.<br />

Part One: <strong>Installation</strong><br />

Chapter 1<br />

General<br />

<strong>Installation</strong><br />

Instructions<br />

Chapter 2<br />

General<br />

System<br />

Description<br />

Chapter 3<br />

Overall<br />

Dimensions<br />

—<br />

<strong>Installation</strong><br />

Chapter 4<br />

System<br />

Component<br />

Preparation<br />

General requirements concerning the <strong>CN</strong>C environment:<br />

- operating conditions<br />

- power consumption<br />

- heat dissipation<br />

- electrical specifications<br />

- equipment colour.<br />

Detailed explanation of the various possible configurations.<br />

Overview of the system architecture.<br />

Data used for installation of the components:<br />

- detailed configuration<br />

- overall dimensions<br />

- mounting dimensions.<br />

Card layout in racks.<br />

Rack addresses.<br />

Temperature probe wiring.<br />

Operations on the UC SII CPU.<br />

Preparing the compact panel.<br />

Preparing the machine panel.<br />

Replacing fuses.<br />

Wiring the watchdog.<br />

Foreword<br />

en-938816/4 9


Chapter 5<br />

Interconnections<br />

Chapter 6<br />

Cards<br />

Chapter 7<br />

Cables<br />

10 en-938816/4<br />

Wiring diagram for the different configurations.<br />

General data <strong>and</strong> connections:<br />

- <strong>CN</strong>C panels<br />

- compact panel<br />

- multiplex module<br />

- racks<br />

- machine panels<br />

- NUM diskette drive.<br />

General data <strong>and</strong> interconnection of the cards comprising the system.<br />

Wiring diagrams for the following cables:<br />

- communication<br />

- axes<br />

- analogue inputs/outputs, interrupts <strong>and</strong> timer<br />

- inputs <strong>and</strong> outputs<br />

- power supply<br />

- video/panel.


Part Two: Commissioning<br />

Chapter 8<br />

Initial<br />

Operation<br />

Chapter 9<br />

Load <strong>and</strong> Check<br />

of the PLC<br />

Programme<br />

Chapter 10<br />

Integration<br />

of the Machine<br />

Parameters<br />

Chapter 11<br />

Axis<br />

Calibration<br />

Initial operation procedure.<br />

Foreword<br />

Reference to the PLC Function Programming Manual <strong>and</strong> checking instructions.<br />

Specific features of the compact panel.<br />

Reference to the Parameter <strong>manual</strong>.<br />

Correction of the axis position measurement read by the coupler according to the real<br />

position on the axis.<br />

en-938816/4 11


Chapter 12<br />

Interaxis<br />

Calibration<br />

Chapter 13<br />

Final<br />

Inspection<br />

12 en-938816/4<br />

Correction of the offsets on a slave axis according to the position on a master axis.<br />

Recommended inspection by machining of a reference part.


Use of the <strong>Installation</strong> <strong>and</strong> Commissioning Manual<br />

Procedures<br />

The <strong>manual</strong> includes procedures (in particular in Chapters 11 <strong>and</strong> 12).<br />

The actions required are presented as follows:<br />

Reset the system. ☞ Y<br />

On the right are indicated the keys to be pressed in two possible forms:<br />

Dealers<br />

Square keys: correspond to keys on the operator panel.<br />

Foreword<br />

EXIT Rectangular keys: correspond to software keys located in the bottom part of the screen <strong>and</strong> actuated<br />

by function keys (F2-F11) located under the screen.<br />

The list of NUM dealers is given at the end of the <strong>manual</strong>.<br />

Questionnaire<br />

To help us improve the quality of our documentation, we request you return to us the questionnaire at the end of this<br />

<strong>manual</strong>.<br />

en-938816/4 13


14 en-938816/4


Part One<br />

INSTALLATION


General <strong>Installation</strong> Instructions<br />

1 General <strong>Installation</strong> Instructions<br />

1.1 Operating Conditions 1 - 3<br />

1.2 System Power Consumption 1 - 4<br />

1.3 System Cooling 1 - 5<br />

1.4 Interconnections 1 - 6<br />

1.4.1 Mains 1 - 6<br />

1.4.2 Protective <strong>and</strong> Signal Earth 1 - 6<br />

1.4.3 Functional Earth 1 - 7<br />

1.4.3.1 Equipment Operating at Relatively Low<br />

Frequency <strong>and</strong> Low Signal Levels 1 - 7<br />

1.4.3.2 Modern Equipment Operating at High<br />

Frequency <strong>and</strong> High Signal Levels 1 - 8<br />

1.4.4 Equipment Immunity 1 - 10<br />

1.4.4.1 Reduction at the Source (interference<br />

suppression) 1 - 10<br />

1.4.4.2 Reduction of Couplings 1 - 11<br />

1.4.4.3 Equipment Hardening 1 - 12<br />

1.4.5 Diagram of the 0 V, Frame <strong>and</strong> Protective<br />

Earth Links 1 - 13<br />

1.5 Colours of the NUM <strong>1060</strong> Operator Panels 1 - 15<br />

1.6 Screen Saver 1 - 15<br />

en-938816/5 1 - 1<br />

1


1 - 2 en-938816/4


1.1 Operating Conditions<br />

General <strong>Installation</strong> Instructions<br />

! CAUTION<br />

Do not unplug any subassemblies (cards, circuits) with the system live.<br />

Do not solder the equipment when live.<br />

Use earthed soldering irons.<br />

Do not use testers with an output voltage ≥ 5 VDC.<br />

NUM equipment complies with the following st<strong>and</strong>ards:<br />

Reference st<strong>and</strong>ard Level<br />

Temperatures IEC 1131<br />

Mechanical stresses IEC1131<br />

Mains variation IEC1131<br />

Mains brownouts IEC1131<br />

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) IEC 1000-4-2 Level 3<br />

Electromagnetic field IEC 1000-4-3 Level 3 (excluding video)<br />

Fast electric transients IEC 1000-4-4 Level 3<br />

Electric shock IEC 1000-4-5<br />

IEC 1000-4-12<br />

Level 3<br />

Electromagnetic emissions EN 55022<br />

Operating temperature range: Minimum 5 °C, maximum 55 °C.<br />

Cooling: See Sec. 1.3.<br />

The systems must m<strong>and</strong>atorily be located in power cabinets equipped with:<br />

- efficient door seals,<br />

- air cleaners or air/air heat exchangers,<br />

- possibly air-conditioning units.<br />

en-938816/5-E1 1 - 3<br />

1


1.2 System Power Consumption<br />

The system power consumption is calculated by adding the system component power consumptions.<br />

Component<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C racks <strong>and</strong> cards (230 VAC)<br />

• Power supply cards (includes rack consumption)<br />

Power consumption<br />

- 130 W power supply card 45 W<br />

- 60 W power supply card 28 W<br />

• Two-card extension rack<br />

• CPUs<br />

8 W<br />

- UC SII CPU 11 W<br />

- <strong>CN</strong>C/graphic processor 10.2 W<br />

- graphic processor 10.2 W<br />

- memory card 1.27 W<br />

- machine processor 6.85 W<br />

- version 2 <strong>CN</strong>C processor 5 W<br />

- optional daughterboard for high-speed line 5 W<br />

- version 1 <strong>CN</strong>C processor 5.55 W<br />

• Axis card 6.85 W<br />

• IT/serial line card 2 W<br />

• Analogue I/O card<br />

• Input/output cards<br />

6.7 W<br />

- 32/24 I/O card 4 W<br />

- 64-48 I/O card 4 W<br />

- 32-input/24-output card 4 W<br />

- 32-input card 8.44 W<br />

- 32-output card<br />

Panels (230 VAC)<br />

6.4 W<br />

• QWERTY operator panel with 14" CRT 100 W<br />

• 50-key or compact panel with 10" colour CRT 60 W<br />

• 50-key or compact panel with 9" black <strong>and</strong> white CRT 30 W<br />

50-key panel with LCD screen (24 VDC)<br />

Machine panels (24 VDC)<br />

20 W (monitor)<br />

• Machine panel alone 3.8 W<br />

• 32-input/24-output extension<br />

Additional components (24 VDC)<br />

9.8 W<br />

• 32-input interface module 24 W<br />

• 24-output relay module 19.2 W<br />

• Multiplexer module 25 W<br />

• NUM diskette drive 3.5 W<br />

1 - 4 en-938816/5


1.3 System Cooling<br />

General <strong>Installation</strong> Instructions<br />

! CAUTION<br />

The life cycle of electronic equipment is closely related to its operating temperature.<br />

Compliance with the following recommendations will ensure optimal product reliability.<br />

Determining the Air Flow Rate<br />

The heat to be dissipated is at most 175 W for a rack <strong>and</strong> 100 W for the operator panel.<br />

A more detailed calculation can be made by summing the individual power consumptions of the system components<br />

(see 1.2).<br />

The cabinet <strong>and</strong> pendant must be designed such that the temperature difference between the ambient air of the<br />

components (<strong>CN</strong>C, CRT) <strong>and</strong> the ambient air in the shop is less than 10 °C or such that the average annual temperature<br />

of the ambient air of the components does not exceed 40 °C.<br />

The air flow rate required for correct heat dissipation is Q = 0.4 x P<br />

where:<br />

Q = air flow rate (l/s)<br />

P = heat to be dissipated.<br />

Example<br />

For a 50-key panel with 10" colour CRT in a pendant:<br />

P = 60 W<br />

Q = 0.4 x 60 = 24 l/s.<br />

REMARK This calculation should be confirmed by temperature measurements.<br />

Recommendations<br />

Use efficient filters on the cabinet or pendant air intakes.<br />

Do not allow the fans to blow air directly onto the equipment.<br />

en-938816/5 1 - 5<br />

1


1.4 Interconnections<br />

1.4.1 Mains<br />

Supply of the system by the single-phase 230 V mains does not require an isolation transformer but must:<br />

- be independent of disturbed systems: connection as far upstream as possible on the general system, routing away<br />

from power, high interference or low level cables,<br />

- include the supervision, protection <strong>and</strong> cutout components specific to the system.<br />

The installed power must be approximately twice the power rating (For the power consumptions of the system<br />

components, see 1.2) to cater for transient overloads (peaks of around 10 times the rated value for a few cycles).<br />

On mains that may be subject to interference such as:<br />

- voltage or frequency variations,<br />

- microbreaks due to mains equipment switching,<br />

- power failures that are short (a few seconds) or long,<br />

the installer must provide devices allowing the system to operate with in the limits defined by the tolerances.<br />

Always earth the neutral of the 230 VAC power supply.<br />

REMARK In the event of problems due to the mains, call in a specialised contractor authorised<br />

to investigate the problem <strong>and</strong> recommend a suitable power supply source.<br />

1.4.2 Protective <strong>and</strong> Signal Earth<br />

Definition of the concepts of protective <strong>and</strong> signal earth:<br />

- protective earth: low impedance, low frequency path between the circuit <strong>and</strong> earth used in the case of a fault,<br />

- functional earth: low impedance path used between electric circuits for equipotentiality. The purpose of this earth<br />

is the attenuation of all the spurious <strong>and</strong> accidental voltages that can exist between equipment items over a very<br />

wide frequency b<strong>and</strong>.<br />

These two concepts do not correspond to different circuits.<br />

The frame earth is provided by interconnecting all metal components (building structure, piping, cable trays, equipment<br />

enclosures <strong>and</strong> equipment).<br />

The earth is the physical connection (earthing well, earthing mat, building earthing system) to which the frame earth<br />

must be connected.<br />

1 - 6 en-938816/5


1.4.3 Functional Earth<br />

General <strong>Installation</strong> Instructions<br />

A distinction is made between two types of electronic equipment:<br />

- relatively low frequency equipment (a few kHz to a few hundred kHz) operating at low signal levels,<br />

- equipment operating at high frequency (a few tens of MHz to a few hundred MHz) <strong>and</strong> high signal levels.<br />

1.4.3.1 Equipment Operating at Relatively Low Frequency <strong>and</strong> Low Signal Levels<br />

Such equipment mainly includes analogue systems sensitive to a few mV (or μV).<br />

The most troublesome interference is generated by low <strong>and</strong> medium frequency electromagnetic fields injected in<br />

particular in the loops between equipment items. High frequency interference is rejected by the natural b<strong>and</strong>width of<br />

the circuit or by low-pass filters.<br />

The following rules must be applied to decrease interference:<br />

- star connection of the common circuits <strong>and</strong> star connection of the frame earth with a single interconnection between<br />

the two systems,<br />

- when a sensitive wire must be protected against electromagnetic interference by shielding, the shielding is<br />

considered a screen <strong>and</strong> only one end is connected to the earth so as not to create a loop with an interference current<br />

flow in the shielding.<br />

Wrong: loops between equipment items due to interconnection of the earth <strong>and</strong> common wires<br />

Voltage generated (U = ZI)<br />

I : Current generated<br />

A B<br />

AC<br />

magnetic<br />

field<br />

Equipment item 1 Equipment item 2<br />

Right: star connection of earth <strong>and</strong> common wires<br />

: frame earth<br />

: protective earth<br />

: 0 V<br />

Equ. 1<br />

Equ. 2<br />

Z: impedance<br />

of link AB<br />

Equ. 3<br />

Equ. 4<br />

en-938816/4 1 - 7<br />

1


1.4.3.2 Modern Equipment Operating at High Frequency <strong>and</strong> High Signal Levels<br />

Such equipment includes modern logic systems with electronic gates whose switching time are around 1 ns <strong>and</strong> whose<br />

signal levels are high (static switching margin from 400 mV to 1 V).<br />

The most critical interference is electromagnetic interference at frequencies between 30 <strong>and</strong> 300 MHz.<br />

Such interference originates in all open coil circuits (relays, contactors, transformers, motors, transformer-driven<br />

lights, etc.), arcing of circuit breakers when tripping, servo-drive switching devices, HF systems located nearby,<br />

electrostatic discharges generated by the operators, etc.<br />

At such frequencies, the earths must be equipotential. However, the impedance of an earthing wire is high at high<br />

frequency (Z=Lω). For instance, for a 2.5 mm2 wire 1 metre long with an inductance L = 1.4 x 10-6 H, the impedance,<br />

which is 0.09 Ω at 10 kHz, becomes 90 Ω at 10 MHz - <strong>and</strong> the earthing wires do not allow creation of a good frame<br />

earth.<br />

An "earth grid" is used to reduce interference: the equipment items are interconnected by the largest possible number<br />

of links as short as possible.<br />

This is best achieved by using metal parts interconnected by a large number of mounting points ensuring good<br />

electrical conduction (zinc-plated or cadmium-plated steel, stainless steel, removal of paint, use of cleats on aluminum,<br />

etc.).<br />

If the electrical continuity is not sufficiently assured by the mechanical interfacing, the link must be shunted by at least<br />

two short wide bonding braids (length/width ratio ≤ 5 <strong>and</strong> length < 20 cm).<br />

1 - 8 en-938816/4


Example of Meshing<br />

NUM operator panel made<br />

of zinc-plated steel<br />

(to be mounted on a conductive<br />

surface or connected by shunts)<br />

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10<br />

! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ +<br />

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - = +<br />

ESC Q W E R T Y U I O P<br />

: "<br />

CTRL A S D F G H J K L<br />

x off<br />

;<br />

`<br />

< > ?<br />

SHIFT Z X C V B N M<br />

SPACE<br />

, . /<br />

`<br />

/<br />

{ }<br />

[ ]<br />

Pendant<br />

ALL<br />

CAPS<br />

TOOL JOG<br />

MODE<br />

M01<br />

F11 F12 HELP<br />

line line<br />

INS DEL<br />

char char<br />

home Pg Up<br />

VALID<br />

end<br />

Pg Dn<br />

Zinc- or cadmium-plated<br />

metal cable trays<br />

Metal frame equipment<br />

with good electrical conduction<br />

of the mounting points<br />

Conductive seals<br />

or 2 bonding braids<br />

Metal ducts<br />

with conductive mounting<br />

(recommended)<br />

Cabinet mounting points<br />

ensuring good<br />

electrical conductivity<br />

Protective<br />

earthing wire<br />

Rear view of a lathe<br />

Earthing terminal<br />

NUM <strong>CN</strong>C<br />

RELAYS<br />

RELAYS<br />

General <strong>Installation</strong> Instructions<br />

Metal power cabinet<br />

Structural metal<br />

building beam<br />

Electrical continuity<br />

provided<br />

Earthing terminal<br />

Isolating<br />

switch<br />

Earth<br />

DRIVE 1<br />

DRIVE 2<br />

DRIVE 3<br />

The concepts of signal earth <strong>and</strong> protective earth coincide for the equipment, i.e. the logical 0 V is connected to the<br />

frame earth in many points.<br />

The logic circuit connecting cable shielding is earthed at both ends, which contributes to the mesh. In addition, the<br />

internal electronics <strong>and</strong> the enclosure must be at the same potential.<br />

To reduce the loop effects thus created (the field captured depends on the loop surface area), the cables must be<br />

attached to ducts or metal surfaces. This type of wiring has a reductive effect "reductive effect".<br />

In the case of separate power supplies for the logic inputs/outputs, the 0 V of these power supplies must be earthed<br />

<strong>and</strong> the wiring must be made with "reductive effect".<br />

REMARK The earthing grid is not a protective system. The earthing terminals of the equipment<br />

items must be connected to the general system earthing terminal.<br />

Door hinges<br />

to be shunted<br />

en-938816/4 1 - 9<br />

1


1.4.4 Equipment Immunity<br />

EMI immunity of the equipment is achieved by:<br />

- reducing the interference generated by the sources,<br />

- reducing the couplings between source <strong>and</strong> circuit with interference,<br />

- ensuring high immunity of the equipment.<br />

The three approaches are complementary <strong>and</strong> are used simultaneously.<br />

1.4.4.1 Reduction at the Source (interference suppression)<br />

To limit the interference generated by components outside the system, make sure that:<br />

- all the connections on terminal boards are tight,<br />

- all the interference sources (relays, solenoid valves, motors, etc.) are provided with a suitable protection system.<br />

Examples<br />

Low power AC contactor<br />

Medium <strong>and</strong> high power AC contactor<br />

Low power DC contactor<br />

1 - 10 en-938816/4<br />

220 Ω 0.47 µF<br />

1W<br />

+ –


Three-phase motor<br />

General <strong>Installation</strong> Instructions<br />

1.4.4.2 Reduction of Couplings<br />

For correct meshing of the earths (see 1.4.3.2), use metal cards with a conductive surface interconnected (bolted)<br />

together.<br />

Wire with a reductive effect (low surface area loops):<br />

- cables applied against the ducts <strong>and</strong> metal parts forming the frame earth,<br />

- signal forward <strong>and</strong> return path in the same cable (twisted pair).<br />

Earth the shieldings of the logic signal cables at both ends.<br />

Interconnect the cable shielding to the earth on 360 degrees:<br />

- with a conductive gl<strong>and</strong> to penetrate through a bulkhead,<br />

- by pinching the shielding with metal covers themselves in contact with the earth for connector plugs.<br />

Connection of a shielding to a frame earth<br />

PROHIBITED<br />

ACCEPTABLE<br />

Earthing<br />

rail<br />

CORRECT<br />

M<br />

IDEAL 360-degree<br />

CONTACT<br />

Frame Frame<br />

en-938816/4 1 - 11<br />

1


Interconnection of a Shielding to a Connector Plug Cover<br />

Earth the cable shieldings over 360 degrees: fold the shieldings onto the cables over a length of 1 cm <strong>and</strong> clamp them<br />

in the cover clamp.<br />

Attachment<br />

screw<br />

SUB D<br />

CONNECTOR<br />

1 - 12 en-938816/5-E1<br />

Location<br />

of the wiring<br />

Cable<br />

clamp<br />

Cables<br />

Half-cover<br />

Cable<br />

shielding<br />

Separate the low-level cables from the power circuits or circuits with interference:<br />

- by physical separation between the cables (at least 30 cm desirable),<br />

- by routing in ducts with separate, distant cable trays,<br />

- by 90-degree crossings.<br />

The analogue inputs (for the servo-drives, for instance) must be differential (common mode rejection).<br />

Particular Case of Servo-Drive Wiring<br />

The systems are low level (sensitive to microvolt levels) <strong>and</strong> low frequency. The link must therefore be protected by<br />

a screen earthed on the <strong>CN</strong>C side only (see 1.4.3.1) <strong>and</strong> overshielding on the cable, earthed at both ends for the mesh.<br />

When these recommendations are not applicable (unavailability of cables with double shielding, etc), preference shall<br />

be given to the earthing mesh using a cable with single shielding earthed at both ends.<br />

1.4.4.3 Equipment Hardening<br />

This is related to the equipment design. Particular care was taken to ensure equipment immunity:<br />

- multilayer cards with internal grounding plane,<br />

- stainless steel enclosure of the system <strong>and</strong> front panels ensuring good contact with the enclosure, with the<br />

assembly forming an excellent Faraday cage,<br />

- metal connectors ensuring continuity with the front panels, provided with metal covers with 360 degree shielding<br />

connection,<br />

- high level of mains filtering at the power supply input,<br />

- opto-isolated binary inputs/outputs with physical separation of circuits with interference.<br />

All these measures make the equipment highly resistant to electromagnetic interference.


1.4.5 Diagram of the 0 V, Frame <strong>and</strong> Protective Earth Links<br />

230 VAC<br />

SEE DETAIL 1<br />

PENDANT<br />

VIDEO/OPERATOR PANEL<br />

STORAGE UNIT<br />

PERIPHERAL<br />

AXES<br />

General <strong>Installation</strong> Instructions<br />

LEGEND<br />

SEE DETAIL 2<br />

Shielding<br />

Screening<br />

(not compulsory)<br />

or<br />

or<br />

POWER CABINET<br />

SERVO-DRIVE<br />

Axis or Spindle<br />

Shielding not connected at this end<br />

Shielding connected at this end<br />

Twisted wires<br />

0 V<br />

Frame earth<br />

Protective earth<br />

! CAUTION<br />

The 0 V of the 24 VDC power supplies must m<strong>and</strong>atorily be connected to the frame earth<br />

en-938816/5 1 - 13<br />

1


Detail 1<br />

Detail 2<br />

1 - 14 en-938816/4<br />

Axis card<br />

Axes<br />

Op. panel<br />

5V<br />

Screening<br />

not compulsory<br />

230 VAC<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C processor or<br />

machine processor card<br />

Graphic display<br />

processor<br />

5V<br />

Shielding<br />

Peripheral<br />

Video / Operator<br />

panel<br />

Video /<br />

Operator panel<br />

Power supply


1.5 Colours of the NUM <strong>1060</strong> Operator Panels<br />

The colours used on the NUM <strong>1060</strong> operator panels are st<strong>and</strong>ard colours:<br />

General <strong>Installation</strong> Instructions<br />

Colour Used on St<strong>and</strong>ard<br />

Dark grey Background RAL 7021<br />

Medium grey Keys RAL 7036<br />

Light grey Keys RAL 7032<br />

Red Side trim PANTONE WARM RED C<br />

1.6 Screen Saver<br />

The <strong>CN</strong>C has a screen saver system designed to extend the screen life. When the screen saver is activated by the<br />

PLC programme, it turns off the screen after five minutes of keyboard inactivity. Pressing any key redisplays the<br />

previously active page.<br />

It is recommended to activate the screen saver by the PLC programme. This is done by setting bit SC_SAVE (%W5.7).<br />

en-938816/4 1 - 15<br />

1


1 - 16 en-938816/4


General System Description<br />

2 General System Description<br />

2.1 System Components 2 - 3<br />

2.1.1 Operator Panel 2 - 3<br />

2.1.1.1 QWERTY Operator Panel 2 - 3<br />

2.1.1.2 50-Key Panel 2 - 3<br />

2.1.1.3 Compact Panels 2 - 4<br />

2.1.2 Main Rack 2 - 4<br />

2.1.3 Extension Racks 2 - 5<br />

2.1.4 Machine Panel 2 - 5<br />

2.1.5 Additional Components 2 - 6<br />

2.2 Basic Configuration 2 - 8<br />

2.3 Multipanel Configuration 2 - 8<br />

2.4 Multi-<strong>CN</strong>C Configuration 2 - 9<br />

2.5 Multirack Configurations 2 - 9<br />

2.6 System Architecture 2 - 10<br />

2.6.1 <strong>1060</strong> Series II System 2 - 10<br />

2.6.1.1 <strong>1060</strong> Series II with Biprocessor 2 - 10<br />

2.6.1.2 <strong>1060</strong> Series II with UC SII Processor 2 - 11<br />

2.6.2 <strong>1060</strong> Series I System 2 - 12<br />

en-938816/5 2 - 1<br />

2


2 - 2 en-938816/5


2.1 System Components<br />

2.1.1 Operator Panel<br />

2.1.1.1 QWERTY Operator Panel<br />

2.1.1.2 50-Key Panel<br />

14" Colour Operator Panel<br />

General System Description<br />

Subassemblies Weight (kg)<br />

Operator panel 16.5<br />

Câble vidéo<br />

10" Colour <strong>and</strong> 9" Monochrome Operator Panels<br />

Subassemblies Weight (kg)<br />

Operator panel 10.7<br />

Video cable<br />

Panel with LCD Display<br />

Subassemblies Weight (kg)<br />

Monitor 3.6<br />

Keyboard 2.1<br />

Video <strong>and</strong> keyboard cables<br />

en-938816/5 2 - 3<br />

2


2.1.1.3 Compact Panels<br />

2.1.2 Main Rack<br />

The main rack is available in two versions:<br />

2 - 4 en-938816/5<br />

10" colour <strong>and</strong> 9" monochrome compact panels<br />

Subassemblies Weight (kg)<br />

Operator panel 11<br />

Video cable<br />

<strong>1060</strong> Series II Rack<br />

Subassemblies Configuration Weight (kg)<br />

12" single rack (or 19") 4.920<br />

60 W power supply card 1.870<br />

or 130 W power supply card 2.130<br />

UC SII CPU (two <strong>CN</strong>C card slots) 0.780<br />

Biprocessor CPU Graphic/<strong>CN</strong>C processor 0.360<br />

(three <strong>CN</strong>C card slots) Machine processor 0.390<br />

Memory card 0.460<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C cards Axis cards<br />

Special interfaces<br />

0.310<br />

Input/output cards 32-input/24-output cards<br />

64-48 or 32-24 I/O card<br />

0.340<br />

<strong>1060</strong> Series I Rack<br />

Subassemblies Configuration Weight (kg)<br />

19" single rack (or 12") 6.800<br />

60 W power supply card 1.870<br />

or 130 W power supply card 2.130<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C cards Graphic processor 0.360<br />

Machine processor 0.390<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C processor 0.315<br />

Memory card 0.460<br />

Axis cards<br />

Special interfaces<br />

0.310<br />

Input/output cards 32-input cards 0.295<br />

32-output cards 0.490<br />

32-input/24-output cards<br />

64-48 or 32-24 I/O card<br />

0.340


General System Description<br />

The table below gives the maximum number of input/output cards according to the number of slots occupied by <strong>CN</strong>C<br />

cards in a 12" rack:<br />

Number of <strong>CN</strong>C cards<br />

Number of input/<br />

4 5 6 or 7<br />

output cards 4 3 2<br />

The table below gives the maximum number of input/output cards according to the number of slots occupied by <strong>CN</strong>C<br />

cards in a 19" rack:<br />

Number of <strong>CN</strong>C cards<br />

Number of input/<br />

5 or 6 7 8 or 9 10 11 or 12 13 14 or 15<br />

output cards 8 7 6 5 4 3 2<br />

2.1.3 Extension Racks<br />

Two types of extension racks are available:<br />

2.1.4 Machine Panel<br />

12-Slot Extension Racks<br />

Subassemblies Weight (kg)<br />

12-slot rack 6.800<br />

130 W power supply card 2.130<br />

Fibre-optic connecting cables<br />

Input/output cards 32-intput card (maximum 8) 0.295<br />

(3 to 12) 32-output card (maximum 8) 0.490<br />

32-input/24-output cards<br />

64-48 or 32-24 I/O card<br />

0.340<br />

2-Slot Extension Racks<br />

Subassemblies Weight (kg)<br />

2-slot extension rack (including power supply)<br />

Fibre-optic connecting cables<br />

2.140<br />

Input/output cards 32-input card 0.295<br />

(1 or 2) 32-output card 0.490<br />

32-input/24-output cards<br />

64-48 or 32-24 I/O card<br />

0.340<br />

Subassemblies Weight (kg)<br />

Machine panel<br />

Fibre-optic cables<br />

2.200<br />

Machine panel extension (optional) 0.300<br />

H<strong>and</strong>wheel (optional) 0.515<br />

en-938816/5 2 - 5<br />

2


2.1.5 Additional Components<br />

AXE<br />

N°<br />

2 - 6 en-938816/5<br />

32-Input Interfacing Modul<br />

Subassemblies Weight (kg)<br />

Interfacing module 0.415<br />

Connecting cable to the input/output card<br />

24-Output Relay Module<br />

Subassemblies Weight (kg)<br />

Relay module 1.250<br />

Connecting cable to the input/output card<br />

Axis Interface Module<br />

Subassemblies Weight (kg)<br />

Axis interface module<br />

Axis interface connecting cable<br />

0.230<br />

Multiplexer Module<br />

Subassemblies Weight (kg)<br />

Multiplexer module<br />

Kit of video cables <strong>and</strong> connector caps<br />

1.580


TTL/RS 232 <strong>and</strong> RS 485 Adapter<br />

Subassemblies<br />

Adaptor<br />

TTL/adapter connecting cable<br />

H<strong>and</strong>wheel<br />

Weight: 0.615 kg<br />

NUM Diskette Drive<br />

Subassemblies<br />

Diskette drive<br />

Serial interface cable<br />

NUM keyboard<br />

General System Description<br />

en-938816/5 2 - 7<br />

2


2.2 Basic Configuration<br />

The basic configuration includes the following components:<br />

2.3 Multipanel Configuration<br />

2 - 8 en-938816/5<br />

Operator panel (QWERTY or 50-key or compact panel) + cable<br />

Main rack (<strong>1060</strong> Series I or <strong>1060</strong> Series II)<br />

Machine panel (optional, not allowed in a configuration with compact panel)<br />

The multipanel configuration (1 <strong>CN</strong>C/1 to 4 operator panels) includes the following components:<br />

Basic configuration (except compact panel)<br />

Additional operator panels (QWERTY, 50-key)<br />

Multiplexer modules + cables <strong>and</strong> connector caps


2.4 Multi-<strong>CN</strong>C Configuration<br />

The multi-<strong>CN</strong>C configuration (1 operator panel/2 to 4 <strong>CN</strong>Cs) includes the following components:<br />

2.5 Multirack Configurations<br />

Basic configuration (except compact panel)<br />

Additional main racks (<strong>1060</strong> Series I or <strong>1060</strong> Series II)<br />

Multiplexer module + cables <strong>and</strong> connector caps<br />

General System Description<br />

In the single <strong>CN</strong>C version (one main rack), the multirack configuration includes the following components:<br />

<strong>1060</strong> Series I basic configuration<br />

1 to 6 extension racks (2 or 12 slots) + fibre-optic connecting cables<br />

In a multi-<strong>CN</strong>C configuration, there can be one multirack system per main rack: up to six extension racks per <strong>CN</strong>C<br />

system.<br />

en-938816/5 2 - 9<br />

2


2.6 System Architecture<br />

The system is built around the system bus. Two versions are available: Series I <strong>and</strong> Series II.<br />

2.6.1 <strong>1060</strong> Series II System<br />

2.6.1.1 <strong>1060</strong> Series II with Biprocessor<br />

System Bus<br />

2 - 10 en-938816/5<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C/graphic<br />

processor<br />

Memory<br />

Axes<br />

Special<br />

interfaces<br />

Machine<br />

processor<br />

Serial Bus<br />

Serial link<br />

Panel<br />

or<br />

Speed reference<br />

Measurement<br />

Origin switch<br />

Inputs<br />

Outputs<br />

Serial bus/fibre<br />

optic<br />

adapter<br />

Interrupts<br />

Analogue inputs/outputs<br />

∗ The use of the compact panel precludes the use of a machine panel.<br />

or<br />

Compact panel ∗<br />

Optional keyboard<br />

Machine<br />

panel<br />

Machine<br />

panel<br />

extension (I/O)


2.6.1.2 <strong>1060</strong> Series II with UC SII Processor<br />

System Bus<br />

Serial Bus<br />

U<br />

C<br />

S II<br />

Graphic<br />

function<br />

Memory<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C<br />

function<br />

PLC<br />

function<br />

Serial<br />

bus/fibre<br />

optic adapter<br />

Inputs<br />

Outputs<br />

Axes<br />

Dedicated<br />

interfaces<br />

Panel<br />

RS 232 serial interface<br />

Interrupt<br />

∗ The use of the compact panel precludes the use of a machine panel.<br />

or<br />

Analogue inputs/outputs<br />

Machine<br />

panel<br />

Machine<br />

panel<br />

extension (I/O)<br />

Speed reference<br />

Measurement<br />

Origin switch<br />

General System Description<br />

or<br />

Compact panel ∗<br />

Optional keyboard<br />

en-938816/5 2 - 11<br />

2


2.6.2 <strong>1060</strong> Series I System<br />

System Bus<br />

2 - 12 en-938816/5<br />

Graphic<br />

processor<br />

Memory<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C<br />

processor<br />

Axes<br />

Special<br />

interfaces<br />

Machine<br />

processor<br />

Serial Bus<br />

Panel<br />

Serial link<br />

Speed reference<br />

Measurement<br />

Origin switch<br />

Inputs<br />

Outputs<br />

Serial bus/fibre<br />

optic<br />

adapter<br />

Interrupts<br />

Analogue inputs/outputs<br />

Serial link<br />

∗ The use of the compact panel precludes the use of a machine panel.<br />

or<br />

or<br />

Compact panel ∗<br />

Optional keyboark<br />

Remote<br />

inputs<br />

Remote<br />

outputs<br />

Machine<br />

panel<br />

Machine<br />

panel<br />

extension (I/O)


Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

3 Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

3.1 QWERTY 14" Colour Operator Panel 3 - 3<br />

3.1.1 Operator Panel Mounting Parts 3 - 3<br />

3.1.2 Overall Dimensions of the Operator Panel 3 - 4<br />

3.1.3 Cutout for Panel Mounting 3 - 5<br />

3.2 50-Key Panels 3 - 6<br />

3.2.1 50-Key 9" Monochrome <strong>and</strong> 10" Colour<br />

Panels 3 - 6<br />

3.2.1.1 Operator Panel Mounting Parts 3 - 6<br />

3.2.1.2 Overall Dimensions of the Operator Panel 3 - 7<br />

3.2.1.3 Cutouts for Panel Mounting 3 - 8<br />

3.2.2 50-Key Panels with LCD Display 3 - 9<br />

3.2.2.1 Panel Mounting Parts 3 - 9<br />

3.2.2.2 Overall Dimensions of the Panels 3 - 10<br />

3.2.2.3 Cutouts for Panel Mounting 3 - 11<br />

3.3 Compact Panel 3 - 12<br />

3.3.1 Panel Mounting Parts 3 - 12<br />

3.3.2 Overall Dimensions of the Compact Panel 3 - 13<br />

3.3.3 Cutouts for Compact Panel Mounting 3 - 14<br />

3.4 Multiplexer Module 3 - 15<br />

3.4.1 Multiplexer Module Mounting Parts 3 - 15<br />

3.4.2 Overall Dimensions <strong>and</strong> Mounting<br />

Dimensions of the Multiplexer Module 3 - 16<br />

3.4.3 Multiplexer Module Mounting on the<br />

QWERTY Operator Panel 3 - 17<br />

3.5 Card Racks 3 - 18<br />

3.5.1 Rack Mounting Parts 3 - 18<br />

3.5.2 Rack Sizes <strong>and</strong> Clearances 3 - 20<br />

3.5.3 Rack Mounting Cutouts 3 - 22<br />

3.6 Machine Panel 3 - 24<br />

3.6.1 Machine Panel Mounting Parts 3 - 24<br />

3.6.2 Overall Dimensions of the Machine Panel 3 - 25<br />

3.6.3 Cutouts for Machine Panel Mounting 3 - 25<br />

3.7 Additional Components 3 - 26<br />

3.7.1 Mounting of the 32-Input Interfacing Module 3 - 26<br />

3.7.2 Mounting of the 24-Output Relay Module 3 - 27<br />

3.7.3 Mounting of the Axis Interface Module 3 - 28<br />

3.7.4 Mounting of RS 232 <strong>and</strong> RS 485 Adaptors 3 - 28<br />

3.7.5 Mounting of the NUM Diskette Drive 3 - 29<br />

3.7.6 H<strong>and</strong>wheel Mounting 3 - 30<br />

3.7.7 Overall Dimensions of Sub.D Connector<br />

Covers (Cable) 3 - 31<br />

3.7.8 Overall Dimensions of the Axis Connector<br />

Covers 3 - 31<br />

3.7.9 Mounting of the NUM Keyboard 3 - 32<br />

en-938816/5 3 - 1<br />

3


3 - 2 en-938816/5


3.1 QWERTY 14" Colour Operator Panel<br />

Weight: 16.5 kg<br />

3.1.1 Operator Panel Mounting Parts<br />

1<br />

3<br />

1 - Operator panel<br />

2 - Edge trim<br />

3 - Operator panel attaching screw <strong>and</strong> washer (8)<br />

2<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

en-938816/5 3 - 3<br />

3


3.1.2 Overall Dimensions of the Operator Panel<br />

20<br />

!<br />

1<br />

F1<br />

@<br />

2<br />

F2<br />

3 - 4 en-938816/5<br />

#<br />

3<br />

F3<br />

F4<br />

ESC Q W E R T Y U I O P<br />

CTRL A S<br />

x off<br />

D F G H J K L<br />

F5<br />

F6<br />

SHIFT Z X C V B N M<br />

< > ?<br />

SPACE<br />

, . /<br />

/<br />

$<br />

4<br />

%<br />

5<br />

^<br />

6<br />

&<br />

7<br />

*<br />

8<br />

F7<br />

483<br />

(<br />

9<br />

F8<br />

)<br />

0<br />

F9<br />

_<br />

-<br />

:<br />

;<br />

F10<br />

+<br />

= +<br />

{<br />

[<br />

"<br />

`<br />

}<br />

]<br />

`<br />

ALL<br />

CAPS<br />

TOOL JOG<br />

MODE<br />

F11 F12 HELP<br />

line<br />

INS<br />

char<br />

M01<br />

home Pg Up<br />

end<br />

line<br />

DEL<br />

char<br />

340 ≅ 70<br />

1<br />

2 4<br />

3<br />

VALID<br />

97<br />

Pg Dn<br />

399<br />

60<br />

290<br />

Clearance<br />

for cables<br />

Overall dimensions<br />

with multiplexer<br />

module <strong>and</strong> cables<br />

400 35<br />

40<br />

185


3.1.3 Cutout for Panel Mounting<br />

89 89 32.5<br />

32.5<br />

8 M6 holes<br />

Cutout<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

4 dia. 10 mm holes<br />

= 451<br />

=<br />

466<br />

! CAUTION<br />

It is recommended to make sure the enclosure over the rear part of the operator panel<br />

provides IP65 protection.<br />

=<br />

235<br />

=<br />

389<br />

en-938816/5 3 - 5<br />

3


3.2 50-Key Panels<br />

3.2.1 50-Key 9" Monochrome <strong>and</strong> 10" Colour Panels<br />

Weight: 10.7 kg<br />

3.2.1.1 Operator Panel Mounting Parts<br />

3 - 6 en-938816/5<br />

1<br />

3<br />

1 - Operator panel<br />

2 - Edge trim<br />

3 - Operator panel attaching screw <strong>and</strong> washer (4)<br />

2


3.2.1.2 Overall Dimensions of the Operator Panel<br />

220<br />

16<br />

252 70<br />

HELP MODE TOOL JOG<br />

//<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

483 294 (for 10") 30<br />

1 2 3<br />

N G H<br />

F '<br />

U<br />

;<br />

I S<br />

x off<br />

:<br />

X A<br />

Y B<br />

V (<br />

J )<br />

T<br />

Z<br />

[<br />

W K +<br />

C<br />

M<br />

]<br />

P<br />

D<br />

Q<br />

L<br />

0<br />

_<br />

{<br />

?<br />

} ,<br />

"<br />

R<br />

E<br />

SHIFT CTRL<br />

SPACE<br />

7 &<br />

183<br />

\ ~<br />

8 9<br />

S<br />

4 5 6<br />

1 !<br />

∗<br />

INS/<br />

OVER<br />

line<br />

DEL<br />

char<br />

2 @<br />

3 #<br />

= /<br />

0<br />

ENTER<br />

home<br />

PgUp<br />

end<br />

PgDn<br />

197<br />

Clearance<br />

for cables<br />

62<br />

253 (for 9")<br />

en-938816/5 3 - 7<br />

3


3.2.1.3 Cutouts for Panel Mounting<br />

26<br />

30<br />

3 - 8 en-938816/5<br />

4 M6 holes<br />

Cutout<br />

= 451<br />

=<br />

466<br />

4 dia. 10 mm holes<br />

REMARK The cutout dimensions are the same as for the compact panel. Only the attaching<br />

holes differ between the two types of panels.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

It is recommended to make sure the enclosure over the rear part of the operator panel<br />

provides IP65 protection.<br />

9<br />

180<br />

13<br />

202


3.2.2 50-Key Panels with LCD Display<br />

Weight: 3.6 kg for the monitor <strong>and</strong> 2.1 kg for the keyboard<br />

3.2.2.1 Panel Mounting Parts<br />

4<br />

1 2<br />

1 - Monitor<br />

2 - Keyboard<br />

3 - Keyboard <strong>and</strong> monitor attaching screws (10)<br />

4 - Seal<br />

3<br />

! CAUTION<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

The liquid cristals contained in the LCD displays are a health hazard if spilled due to breakage<br />

of the display.<br />

In case of contact with the eyes or mouth, rinse immediately with a large amount of water.<br />

In case of contact with the skin or clothing, clean with alcohol then rinse with a large<br />

amount of water.<br />

en-938816/5 3 - 9<br />

3


3.2.2.2 Overall Dimensions of the Panels<br />

260<br />

Y B<br />

V (<br />

J )<br />

} T ,<br />

[<br />

Z W K +<br />

C<br />

]<br />

"<br />

P<br />

D<br />

1 2 3<br />

N G H<br />

F '<br />

U<br />

;<br />

I S<br />

x off<br />

:<br />

X A<br />

_<br />

0<br />

M<br />

{<br />

?<br />

Q E<br />

R L<br />

SHIFT CTRL<br />

HELP MODE TOOL JOG<br />

3 - 10 en-938816/5<br />

200 76 5 320 82 5<br />

SPACE<br />

7 &<br />

\ ~<br />

8 9<br />

S<br />

4 5 6<br />

1 !<br />

∗<br />

INS/<br />

OVER<br />

line<br />

DEL<br />

char<br />

2 @<br />

3 #<br />

= /<br />

0<br />

ENTER<br />

home<br />

PgUp<br />

end<br />

PgDn<br />

242<br />

260<br />

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12<br />

182 302<br />

242


3.2.2.3 Cutouts for Panel Mounting<br />

242<br />

4.8<br />

182<br />

Cutout for<br />

keyboard<br />

4 M4 holes<br />

191.6<br />

21<br />

200<br />

242<br />

4.8<br />

6 M4 holes<br />

155.8<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

302<br />

Cutout for<br />

monitor<br />

REMARK The monitor <strong>and</strong> keyboard are interconnected by two 2-metre cables <strong>and</strong> must<br />

therefore not be more than 1.5 m apart.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

155.8<br />

It is recommended to provide an IP65 seal on the enclosure around the rear part<br />

of the panel.<br />

4.8<br />

25.8<br />

200<br />

25.8<br />

en-938816/5 3 - 11<br />

3


3.3 Compact Panel<br />

Weight: 11 kg<br />

3.3.1 Panel Mounting Parts<br />

2<br />

3 - 12 en-938816/5<br />

1<br />

1 - Panel<br />

2 - Panel attaching screw <strong>and</strong> washer (6)<br />

! CAUTION<br />

The panel is not sealed unless the cover is installed over the front panel connectors.


3.3.2 Overall Dimensions of the Compact Panel<br />

220<br />

16<br />

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12<br />

271<br />

Clearance<br />

for cables<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

483 308 (for 10") 37<br />

G %<br />

M E<br />

/ F<br />

x H<br />

7 N<br />

4 X<br />

1 A<br />

D P<br />

8 S<br />

5 Y<br />

2 B<br />

9 T<br />

- =<br />

6 Z<br />

+ !<br />

3 C<br />

0 Q<br />

. R<br />

a<br />

80<br />

180<br />

60<br />

202<br />

150<br />

266 (for 9")<br />

en-938816/5 3 - 13<br />

3


3.3.3 Cutouts for Compact Panel Mounting<br />

3 - 14 en-938816/5<br />

6 M4 holes<br />

Cutout<br />

= 211.5<br />

211.5<br />

=<br />

451<br />

REMARK The cutout dimensions are the same as for the 50-key panels. Only the attachment<br />

holes differ between the two types of panels.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

It is recommended to make sure the enclosure over the rear part of the operator panel<br />

provides IP65 protection.<br />

=<br />

202<br />

=<br />

211.6


3.4 Multiplexer Module<br />

Weight: 1.580 kg<br />

3.4.1 Multiplexer Module Mounting Parts<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1 - Multiplexer module<br />

2 - Module attaching screws <strong>and</strong> washers (4)<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

REMARK The multiplexer module must be located away from the panels:<br />

- In multi-<strong>CN</strong>C configuration, locate the multiplexer module as far as possible from<br />

the panel, considering that the interconnecting cable is 50 cm long,<br />

- In multipanel configuration, locate the multiplexer modules at least 50 cm from<br />

each of the panels.<br />

en-938816/5-E1 3 - 15<br />

3


3.4.2 Overall Dimensions <strong>and</strong> Mounting Dimensions of the Multiplexer Module<br />

145<br />

15<br />

3 - 16 en-938816/5<br />

360<br />

= 348<br />

=<br />

4 dia. 5 mm holes<br />

for M4 screws<br />

= 336<br />

=<br />

Clearance<br />

for cables<br />

145<br />

=<br />

70<br />

=<br />

69<br />

102


3.4.3 Multiplexer Module Mounting on the QWERTY Operator Panel<br />

The multiplexer module should not be mounted on the QWERTY panel.<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

This setup should no longer<br />

be used<br />

See 3.4.1<br />

en-938816/5-E1 3 - 17<br />

3


3.5 Card Racks<br />

Weight of 19" main racks <strong>and</strong> 12-slot extension rack with cards: 13 to 15 kg (see 2.1 to calculate the rack weight<br />

according to the configuration).<br />

Weight of 12" racks equipped with cards: approximately 10 kg (see 2.1 to calculate the rack weight according to the<br />

configuration).<br />

Weight of 2-slot extension racks with cards: 2.950 kg.<br />

3.5.1 Rack Mounting Parts<br />

Main racks <strong>and</strong> 12-slot extension racks.<br />

3 - 18 en-938816/5<br />

4<br />

1 - Rack<br />

2 - Rear attachment bracket (2) used optionally<br />

3 - Bracket attaching screw (8) used optionally<br />

4 - Rack attaching screw <strong>and</strong> washer (4)<br />

1<br />

3<br />

2


2-Slot Extension Racks<br />

0<br />

9<br />

5<br />

4<br />

1 23<br />

1 - 2-slot extension rack<br />

2 - Rear attachment brackets (4) used optionally<br />

3 - Bracket attaching screws (4) used optionally<br />

4 - Rack attaching screw<br />

4<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

1<br />

3<br />

2<br />

en-938816/5 3 - 19<br />

3


3.5.2 Rack Sizes <strong>and</strong> Clearances<br />

Main racks <strong>and</strong> 12-slot extension racks.<br />

483 (19" rack) or 320 (12" rack) 220 (rack without cables)<br />

X = 100: minimum clearance required for the cables<br />

200: minimum clearance required for card extraction<br />

3 - 20 en-938816/5<br />

310.4<br />

70<br />

Minimum clearance<br />

for air flow<br />

20<br />

X<br />

68.5


2-Slot Extension Rack<br />

142<br />

116.2<br />

265.9<br />

≅ 100<br />

clearance for air flow<br />

≅ 100<br />

X = 100: minimum clearance required for the cables<br />

200: minimum clearance required for card extraction<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

220 (rack without cables) X<br />

en-938816/5 3 - 21<br />

3


3.5.3 Rack Mounting Cutouts<br />

Main racks <strong>and</strong> 12-slot extension racks<br />

39.7 190.5<br />

3 - 22 en-938816/5<br />

4 M6 holes<br />

Front mounting or rear mounting<br />

Holes <strong>and</strong> cutout<br />

Cutout for front mounting<br />

Rear attachment<br />

brackets<br />

= 437 (19" rack) or 274 (12" rack)<br />

=<br />

465.9 (19" rack) or 303 (12" rack)<br />

314


Extension Racks<br />

The four attaching screws are preinstalled.<br />

2<br />

Side mounting<br />

(on panel or rail)<br />

245.9<br />

Front panel<br />

left-h<strong>and</strong> mounting<br />

1<br />

3<br />

35<br />

screwdriver with blade<br />

at least 120 mm long<br />

Holes<br />

4.5<br />

= =<br />

4 M3 holes<br />

130<br />

27<br />

1<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

3<br />

rear attachment<br />

brackets<br />

Rear mounting<br />

(on panel or rail)<br />

10<br />

Front panel<br />

right-h<strong>and</strong> mounting<br />

Clearance<br />

rear mounting<br />

2<br />

en-938816/5 3 - 23<br />

3


3.6 Machine Panel<br />

Weight: 2.200 kg unequipped (add 0.300 kg for the extension <strong>and</strong>/or 0.515 kg for the h<strong>and</strong>wheel depending on the<br />

configuration).<br />

3.6.1 Machine Panel Mounting Parts<br />

3 - 24 en-938816/5<br />

1<br />

1 - Machine panel<br />

2 - Machine panel attaching screw (4)<br />

2


3.6.2 Overall Dimensions of the Machine Panel<br />

177<br />

122<br />

80<br />

3<br />

483<br />

280<br />

3.6.3 Cutouts for Machine Panel Mounting<br />

=<br />

= 101.6<br />

4 M6 holes<br />

60<br />

= 451<br />

=<br />

466<br />

! CAUTION<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

50<br />

30<br />

With h<strong>and</strong>wheel<br />

Overall dimensions with<br />

extension connecting cable<br />

Overall dimensions without<br />

extension<br />

It is recommended to make sure the enclosure over the rear part of the operator panel<br />

provides IP65 protection.<br />

167<br />

en-938816/5 3 - 25<br />

3


3.7 Additional Components<br />

3.7.1 Mounting of the 32-Input Interfacing Module<br />

The 32-input interfacing module is available in two models.<br />

Model 1: P/N 263 202 926<br />

Weight: 0.415 kg.<br />

82<br />

80<br />

Model 2: P/N 263 900 001<br />

Weight: 0.300 kg.<br />

86<br />

3 - 26 en-938816/5<br />

71<br />

60<br />

183<br />

183<br />

MOD. INTERFACE 32 E<br />

MOD. INTERFACE 32 E<br />

Mounted by snapping to extrusions complying with st<strong>and</strong>ards EN 50022 (or NF C 63-015) <strong>and</strong> EN 50035<br />

(or NF C 63-018).<br />

REMARK Tighten the cable attaching screws in the terminals to a maximum torque of 0.4 Nm<br />

(IEC 947.1).


3.7.2 Mounting of the 24-Output Relay Module<br />

The 24-output relay module is available in two models.<br />

Model 1: P/N 263 202 931<br />

Weight: 1.250 kg.<br />

98<br />

96<br />

69<br />

Model 2: P/N 263 900 002<br />

Weight: 1.050 kg.<br />

98<br />

96<br />

69<br />

376<br />

376<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

MOD. RELAYAGE 24 S<br />

MOD. RELAYAGE 24 S<br />

Mounted by snapping to extrusions complying with st<strong>and</strong>ards EN 50022 (or NF C 63-015) <strong>and</strong> EN 50035<br />

(or NF C 63-018).<br />

REMARK Tighten the cable attaching screws in the terminals to a maximum torque of 0.4 Nm<br />

(IEC 947.1).<br />

en-938816/5 3 - 27<br />

3


3.7.3 Mounting of the Axis Interface Module<br />

Weight: 0.230 kg.<br />

86<br />

3 - 28 en-938816/5<br />

53<br />

700/800 1000<br />

SIM+<br />

SIM-<br />

2V<br />

S-<br />

A+<br />

A-<br />

B+<br />

B-<br />

Z.DATA+<br />

Z.DATA-<br />

ECLK+<br />

ECLK-<br />

RCLK+<br />

RCLK-<br />

ENCODER P.S<br />

0V<br />

0V<br />

AXIS<br />

N°<br />

ANALOG.AXIS<br />

263900000<br />

1 2<br />

0 1<br />

INT.5V<br />

ADDRESS<br />

ENCODER<br />

!<br />

POWER SUPPLY<br />

POWER<br />

SUPPLY ON<br />

160<br />

SPEED+<br />

SPEED-<br />

SPINDLE 2<br />

SPINDLE 1<br />

HANDWHEEL<br />

700/800 1000<br />

ENCODER SPEED REF. HOME SWITCH<br />

SPEED-<br />

HOME SW<br />

SW.IN<br />

SW.OUT<br />

SPINDLE<br />

SPINDLE<br />

SPINDLE<br />

SPINDLE<br />

HWHEEL<br />

HWHEEL<br />

HWHEEL<br />

HWHEEL<br />

Mounted by snapping to extrusions complying with st<strong>and</strong>ards EN 50022 (or NF C 63-015) <strong>and</strong> EN 50035<br />

(or NF C 63-018).<br />

REMARK Tighten the cable attaching screws in the terminals to a maximum torque of 0.4 Nm<br />

(IEC 947.1).<br />

3.7.4 Mounting of RS 232 <strong>and</strong> RS 485 Adaptors<br />

70<br />

9-Pin Sub.D<br />

male connector<br />

80 for cable<br />

EXT.<br />

88<br />

=<br />

80<br />

SW.OUT<br />

EXT.SUPPLY<br />

5-24V<br />

0V<br />

2 dia. 3.2 mm holes<br />

29 85 80 for cable<br />

=<br />

10 10<br />

= =<br />

15-contact female<br />

Sub.D connector


3.7.5 Mounting of the NUM Diskette Drive<br />

75<br />

147<br />

67<br />

43<br />

13<br />

Overall dimensions<br />

50<br />

Holes <strong>and</strong> cutout<br />

4 M4 holes<br />

Clearance for cables <strong>and</strong> switch<br />

123<br />

= 115<br />

=<br />

Cutout<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

174 44<br />

en-938816/5 3 - 29<br />

3


3.7.6 H<strong>and</strong>wheel Mounting<br />

46.5<br />

-<br />

3 - 30 en-938816/5<br />

108<br />

+<br />

= =<br />

89<br />

= =<br />

=<br />

=<br />

Overall dimensions<br />

108<br />

Holes <strong>and</strong> cutout<br />

4 M5 holes<br />

= =<br />

89<br />

ø 63.5<br />

ø 67<br />

7.5<br />

3<br />

52 35<br />

62 60


3.7.7 Overall Dimensions of Sub.D Connector Covers (Cable)<br />

C<br />

Overall Dimensions - <strong>Installation</strong><br />

Number of contacts A B C<br />

9 31 16 41<br />

15 53 16 38<br />

25 53 16 45<br />

37 70 24 51<br />

REMARK The dimensions given in the table are rounded off <strong>and</strong> correspond to the product line<br />

of a particular supplier. They could differ slightly for other suppliers.<br />

3.7.8 Overall Dimensions of the Axis Connector Covers<br />

74<br />

18<br />

B<br />

A<br />

54<br />

en-938816/5 3 - 31<br />

3


3.7.9 Mounting of the NUM Keyboard<br />

212<br />

5<br />

30<br />

203.6 4.2<br />

3 - 32 en-938816/5<br />

=<br />

8 x 2 foam seal<br />

483<br />

Cutout: 446<br />

30 211.5<br />

211.5<br />

6 dia. 5 mm holes for M4 screws<br />

Drill the seal<br />

=<br />

Cutout: 188 =<br />

=


System Component Preparation<br />

4 System Component Preparation<br />

4.1 Rack Preparation 4 - 3<br />

4.1.1 Card Layout in the Main Rack 4 - 3<br />

4.1.1.1 Layout in a 19" Rack 4 - 3<br />

4.1.1.2 Layout in a 12" Rack 4 - 3<br />

4.1.1.3 <strong>CN</strong>C Card Layout in a <strong>1060</strong> Main Rack 4 - 4<br />

4.1.2 Card Layout in the Extension Racks 4 - 5<br />

4.1.2.1 Input/Output Card Layout in the 12-Slot<br />

Rack 4 - 5<br />

4.1.2.2 Input/Output Layout in the 2-Slot Rack 4 - 5<br />

4.1.3 Addition of Input/Output Cards 4 - 6<br />

4.1.3.1 Machine Processor Programmed in<br />

Assembler Language 4 - 6<br />

4.1.3.2 Machine Processor Programmed in Ladder<br />

Language 4 - 6<br />

4.1.4 Address Assignment to the Racks 4 - 7<br />

4.1.5 Wiring of the Temperature Probe 4 - 8<br />

4.1.6 Operations on the UC SII CPU 4 - 9<br />

4.1.6.1 Replacing the Battery 4 - 10<br />

4.1.6.2 Adding an SRAM Memory Module 4 - 11<br />

4.2 Preparing the Compact Panel 4 - 12<br />

4.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover 4 - 12<br />

4.2.2 Relocating the Keyboard Connector 4 - 13<br />

4.2.3 Installing the Key Customisation Label 4 - 14<br />

4.3 Machine Panel Preparation 4 - 15<br />

4.3.1 Address Assignment to the Machine Panel 4 - 15<br />

4.3.2 H<strong>and</strong>wheel <strong>Installation</strong> 4 - 16<br />

4.3.3 Installing the Machine Panel Extension 4 - 17<br />

4.3.4 Installing the Labels 4 - 18<br />

4.4 General Operations 4 - 20<br />

4.4.1 Replacing Fuses 4 - 20<br />

4.4.1.1 Rack Fuses 4 - 20<br />

4.4.1.2 50-Key 10" Panel Fuse 4 - 20<br />

4.4.1.3 50-Key LCD Panel Fuse 4 - 20<br />

4.4.1.4 10" Compact Panel Fuse 4 - 21<br />

4.4.1.5 Machine Panel Fuse 4 - 21<br />

4.4.2 Wiring of the Watchdog, Safety Daisy<br />

Chain 4 - 21<br />

en-938816/5 4 - 1<br />

4


4 - 2 en-938816/4


4.1 Rack Preparation<br />

4.1.1 Card Layout in the Main Rack<br />

The <strong>CN</strong>C cards are installed one after the other starting from the right.<br />

The input/output cards are installed leftward from the first slot available after the <strong>CN</strong>C cards.<br />

Empty slots are to be covered with blanking plates (10, 20 <strong>and</strong> 30 mm).<br />

4.1.1.1 Layout in a 19" Rack<br />

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0<br />

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5<br />

4.1.1.2 Layout in a 12" Rack<br />

I/O card slots<br />

I/O card slots<br />

8 7 6 5<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C card slots<br />

6 5 4 3 2 1 0<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C card slots<br />

Power supply card<br />

System Component Preparation<br />

Power supply card<br />

en-938816/4 4 - 3<br />

4


4.1.1.3 <strong>CN</strong>C Card Layout in a <strong>1060</strong> Main Rack<br />

To ensure correct operation of the system, install the cards in the order shown in the diagram below:<br />

Other <strong>CN</strong>C cards<br />

4 - 4 en-938816/5<br />

2 1 0<br />

Memory card<br />

Machine processor card<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C/graphic processor card<br />

Biprocessor <strong>1060</strong> Series II<br />

Other <strong>CN</strong>C cards<br />

1 0<br />

UC SII CPU<br />

Monoprocessor <strong>1060</strong> Series II<br />

Other <strong>CN</strong>C cards<br />

3 2 1 0<br />

Memory card<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C processor card<br />

Machine processor card<br />

Graphic processor card<br />

<strong>1060</strong> Series I<br />

REMARK For a system using QVN cards (see DISC Integration Manual) <strong>and</strong>/or IT/serial line<br />

cards, place these cards immediately to the left of the memory card.


4.1.2 Card Layout in the Extension Racks<br />

The input/output cards are installed starting from the right.<br />

Cover empty slots with blanking plates.<br />

4.1.2.1 Input/Output Card Layout in the 12-Slot Rack<br />

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5<br />

4.1.2.2 Input/Output Layout in the 2-Slot Rack<br />

2 1<br />

Power supply card<br />

4 3 2 1<br />

System Component Preparation<br />

Power supply card<br />

en-938816/4 4 - 5<br />

4


4.1.3 Addition of Input/Output Cards<br />

4.1.3.1 Machine Processor Programmed in Assembler Language<br />

When power is applied, the machine processor detects the input/output cards present in the racks by scanning leftward<br />

from the rightmost card:<br />

- in the main rack,<br />

- in the extension racks, in numerical order of the racks (see 4.1.4).<br />

The machine processor addresses individual inputs <strong>and</strong> outputs in the order of card identification.<br />

This means that insertion of a new input or output card changes the addresses of the following input <strong>and</strong> output cards<br />

<strong>and</strong> therefore requires modifying the machine processor programme.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

A new input/output card must be added to the left of the last card of the same type<br />

whenever possible.<br />

If this is not possible (addition of an input or output card between two cards of the same<br />

type), it is necessary to reprogramme the machine processor (see the Automatic Control<br />

Function Programming Manual - Assembler Language) to take into account the offset<br />

created in the inputs <strong>and</strong> outputs.<br />

4.1.3.2 Machine Processor Programmed in Ladder Language<br />

Each input <strong>and</strong> output card is identified by its physical location in the system.<br />

The input <strong>and</strong> output addresses already allocated are therefore not modified by insertion of a new card.<br />

Only the new input <strong>and</strong> output addresses need to be programmed (see the Automatic Control Function Programming<br />

Manual - Assembler Language).<br />

4 - 6 en-938816/4<br />

! CAUTION<br />

Moving an input/output card to another physical location modifies the addressing <strong>and</strong><br />

requires reprogramming the machine processor.


4.1.4 Address Assignment to the Racks<br />

Thumbwheel Thumbwheel<br />

Main racks <strong>and</strong> 12-slot<br />

extension racks<br />

Set the rack addresses on the thumbwheel:<br />

System Component Preparation<br />

5<br />

0<br />

4<br />

1 23<br />

2-slot extension rack<br />

Configuration single rack multirack <strong>and</strong> configuration with machine panel<br />

Main rack address 0 address 7<br />

Extension rack / address from 1 to 6 (different address for each rack)<br />

en-938816/4 4 - 7<br />

4


4.1.5 Wiring of the Temperature Probe<br />

4 - 8 en-938816/5<br />

Temperature probe<br />

Probe characteristics:<br />

- contact normally closed at ambient temperature < 57 °C,<br />

- contact opening temperature: θ = 60 °C + 3 °C,<br />

- contact closing temperature: θ - 7 to 10 °C,<br />

- maximum current rating: 6 A,<br />

- maximum voltage: 220 VAC.<br />

Recommended use<br />

Connect the probe to a machine processor input.<br />

Include it in the drive enable.<br />

Turn on a lamp on the machine panel by means of an output.<br />

2.8 mm AMP terminal<br />

Temperature probe<br />

Machine processor input<br />

+ 24 VDC


4.1.6 Operations on the UC SII CPU<br />

Operations which can be performed on the UC SII CPU:<br />

- battery replacement after 18 months of use,<br />

- memory extension by adding an SRAM memory module.<br />

The diagram below shows the locations concerned by these operations:<br />

2<br />

1<br />

1 - Battery connector<br />

2 - Battery<br />

3 - SRAM memory module location<br />

System Component Preparation<br />

3<br />

en-938816/4 4 - 9<br />

4


4.1.6.1 Replacing the Battery<br />

Unplug the battery.<br />

Remove the old battery from the housing.<br />

Snap the new battery into the housing.<br />

Plug in the battery, being careful to insert the connector correctly.<br />

4 - 10 en-938816/4<br />

! CAUTION<br />

The battery must be replaced within 15 minutes so as not to lose the data present in the<br />

RAM. A special capacitor powers the SRAM modules while the battery is being replaced.


4.1.6.2 Adding an SRAM Memory Module<br />

Position the module at a slant in the connector with the<br />

polarising slot located on the left (1).<br />

Polarising slot<br />

Swing the module up to a vertical position until it snaps in place (2).<br />

2<br />

1<br />

System Component Preparation<br />

en-938816/4 4 - 11<br />

4


4.2 Preparing the Compact Panel<br />

Operations that can be performed on the compact panel:<br />

- relocation of the DIN connector (see 4.2.2)<br />

- installation of the key customisation label (see 4.2.3).<br />

These operations require removing the rear cover (see 4.2.1).<br />

4.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover<br />

Remove the three screws <strong>and</strong> take off the cover.<br />

4 - 12 en-938816/4<br />

Screws<br />

Location of the items concerned by the operations:<br />

Cover<br />

Rear view<br />

Label installation slot<br />

DIN connector support


4.2.2 Relocating the Keyboard Connector<br />

System Component Preparation<br />

The compact panel is equipped with a keyboard connector (5-contact DIN connector) accessible on the front after<br />

removing the cover.<br />

This location of the DIN connector corresponds to occasional use of a PC type keyboard (seal not ensured when the<br />

cover is removed).<br />

For permanent connection of a PC type keyboard, the DIN connector can be moved to the back of the panel:<br />

DIN connector support<br />

attaching nuts<br />

DIN connector located on the front DIN connector relocated on the back of the panel<br />

Unscrew the two DIN connector support attaching nuts.<br />

Turn over the support <strong>and</strong> reinstall the nuts.<br />

en-938816/4 4 - 13<br />

4


4.2.3 Installing the Key Customisation Label<br />

The compact panel has six cutomisable keys. The key assignments are identified by a label at the rear of the panel.<br />

Customising the Label Supplied with the Compact Panel:<br />

4 - 14 en-938816/5<br />

Marking areas<br />

The label can be customised by transfers (Letraset type), Univers 54 font, pitch 12.<br />

Installing the Label on the Rear of the Compact Panel:<br />

18<br />

18<br />

18<br />

18<br />

18<br />

18


4.3 Machine Panel Preparation<br />

4.3.1 Address Assignment to the Machine Panel<br />

Set the machine panel address on the thumbwheel: 1 to 4, with a<br />

different address for each panel.<br />

System Component Preparation<br />

en-938816/4 4 - 15<br />

4


4.3.2 H<strong>and</strong>wheel <strong>Installation</strong><br />

The h<strong>and</strong>wheel is installed on the machine panel without its end plate (remove the cap by cutting the plastic pins with<br />

cutting pliers):<br />

4 - 16 en-938816/4<br />

1 - H<strong>and</strong>wheel body<br />

2 - Attachment screws (3)<br />

3 - Bezel attached by two screws<br />

3<br />

2<br />

! CAUTION<br />

The h<strong>and</strong>wheel may interfere with installation of the key labels.<br />

It is therefore recommended to install the labels (see 4.3.4)<br />

before installing the h<strong>and</strong>wheel.<br />

1


4.3.3 Installing the Machine Panel Extension<br />

The machine panel extension is installed behind the machine panel.<br />

This operation requires removing the protective cover.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

5<br />

1 - Machine panel<br />

2 - Machine panel extension<br />

3 - Protective cover<br />

4 - Screws (8)<br />

5 - Spacers (5)<br />

System Component Preparation<br />

3<br />

4<br />

en-938816/4 4 - 17<br />

4


4.3.4 Installing the Labels<br />

The machine panel keys are not engraved. Their assignment is specified by installing labels in windows 1 to 7 at the<br />

rear of the panel.<br />

The labels can be:<br />

- the st<strong>and</strong>ard labels defined by NUM,<br />

- customised labels.<br />

Set of Labels Supplied with the Machine Panel<br />

4 - 18 en-938816/4<br />

Z-<br />

X-<br />

1 10 100 1 000 10 000 ILL<br />

Window 1<br />

X+ C+<br />

Z+<br />

X- C-<br />

Y+ Z+<br />

X+<br />

Y- Z-<br />

M01<br />

Customisable<br />

window 1<br />

Window 2<br />

Window 3<br />

turning<br />

Window 4<br />

turning<br />

Window 5<br />

turning<br />

Window 3<br />

milling<br />

Window 4<br />

milling<br />

Window 5<br />

milling<br />

Windows 2 to 5<br />

customisable<br />

Window 6<br />

customisable<br />

Window 7<br />

Window 7<br />

customisable<br />

JOG label<br />

Axis JOG<br />

assignment<br />

labels<br />

Machine function<br />

label<br />

Mode label


Installing the Labels at the rear of the Machine Panel<br />

Customising the Labels<br />

The labels can be customised using transfers (Letraset type), Univers 54 font, pitch 12.<br />

6<br />

1<br />

3<br />

5<br />

2<br />

4<br />

System Component Preparation<br />

7<br />

en-938816/4 4 - 19<br />

4


4.4 General Operations<br />

4.4.1 Replacing Fuses<br />

Accessible fuses:<br />

Location Characteristics<br />

12" <strong>and</strong> 19" <strong>and</strong> 2-slot racks 2 fast-blow 2.5 A, 250 V, 5x20 glass fuses<br />

32-24 I/O, 64-48 I/O, Very fast-blow (FF) 10 A, 5x20 fuses - spare fuses are provided on the card<br />

32I/24O <strong>and</strong> analogue<br />

I/O boards<br />

!<br />

4 - 20 en-938816/5<br />

Use only very fast-blow (FF) fuses<br />

10" compact panel Fast-blow 2 A, 250 V, 5x20 glass fuse<br />

10" 50-key panel Fast-blow 2 A, 250 V, 5x20 glass fuse<br />

Monitor of the 50-key 2.5 A, 250 V, 5x20 glass fuse<br />

LCD panel<br />

Machine panel Fast-blow 500 mA, 250 V, 5x20 glass fuse<br />

4.4.1.1 Rack Fuses<br />

Release the fuse-holder cover from the connector with a screwdriver.<br />

Replace the blown fuse.<br />

Install the fuse-holder cover.<br />

4.4.1.2 50-Key 10" Panel Fuse<br />

Unscrew the fuse-holder cover (quarter-turn fastener).<br />

Replace the blown fuse.<br />

Install <strong>and</strong> screw on the fuse-holder cover.<br />

4.4.1.3 50-Key LCD Panel Fuse<br />

Unscrew the fuse-holder cover.<br />

Replace the blown fuse.<br />

Install <strong>and</strong> screw on the fuse-holder cover.<br />

Rear view


4.4.1.4 10" Compact Panel Fuse<br />

Unscrew the fuse-holder cover (quarter-turn fastener).<br />

Replace the blown fuse.<br />

Install <strong>and</strong> screw on the fuse-holder cover.<br />

4.4.1.5 Machine Panel Fuse<br />

Replace the blown fuse.<br />

4.4.2 Wiring of the Watchdog, Safety Daisy Chain<br />

System Component Preparation<br />

Rear view<br />

The watchdog (WD) monitors the machine processor status. WD = 0 indicates a machine processor fault <strong>and</strong> therefore<br />

a fault of the programmed safety devices.<br />

The watchdog output is:<br />

- the first output (OUT.0 of the first card on the main rack or the rack with the lowest number) when the machine<br />

processor is programmed in assembler language,<br />

- the first output (OUT.0) of one of the output cards (to be programmed) when the machine processor is programmed<br />

in ladder language.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

When WD = 0, the <strong>CN</strong>C may continue to control the axes which could cause problems<br />

(collisions, etc.).<br />

Output WD must therefore be hard wired in the safety system so that WD = 0 cuts off the<br />

power, thereby stopping movement.<br />

The system must remain live to allow troubleshooting <strong>and</strong> modification of software data<br />

(which are not the only possible causes of failure).<br />

en-938816/5 4 - 21<br />

4


Recommended safety daisy chain:<br />

<strong>CN</strong>Cr monitor WD monitor <strong>CN</strong>C on Power supply<br />

4 - 22 en-938816/4<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C ready WD <strong>CN</strong>C on<br />

Off pushbutton<br />

On pushbutton<br />

WD monitor<br />

<strong>CN</strong>Cr monitor<br />

<strong>CN</strong>Cr: <strong>CN</strong>C ready<br />

This diagram is used to check that the WD <strong>and</strong> <strong>CN</strong>Cr relays are not operated at power on.<br />

No timeouts are used.<br />

Powering up of the <strong>CN</strong>C is not enabled unless the watchdog <strong>and</strong> <strong>CN</strong>Cr relay are de-energised.<br />

When the <strong>CN</strong>C is on, the PLC programme closes the <strong>CN</strong>Cr relay.<br />

Power application is determined by the presence of WD <strong>and</strong> <strong>CN</strong>Cr.<br />

Power supply<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C on<br />

WD monitor<br />

<strong>CN</strong>Cr monitor


Interconnections<br />

5 Interconnections<br />

5.1 <strong>CN</strong>C/Peripheral Interconnections 5 - 3<br />

5.1.1 Basic Configuration 5 - 3<br />

5.1.2 Video Connection for the Basic<br />

Configuration 5 - 4<br />

5.1.3 Multirack Configuration 5 - 5<br />

5.1.4 Multipanel Configuration (2 to 4) 5 - 6<br />

5.1.5 Multi-<strong>CN</strong>C Configuration 5 - 7<br />

5.2 Operator Panel 5 - 8<br />

5.2.1 <strong>CN</strong>C Panels with CRT 5 - 8<br />

5.2.1.1 General 5 - 8<br />

5.2.1.2 Operator Panel Connection Diagram 5 - 9<br />

5.2.2 50-Key Panel with LCD 5 - 10<br />

5.2.2.1 General 5 - 10<br />

5.2.2.2 Panel Connection Diagram 5 - 11<br />

5.2.3 Compact Panel 5 - 12<br />

5.2.3.1 General 5 - 12<br />

5.2.3.2 Connection of a 102-Key Keyboard 5 - 12<br />

5.2.3.3 Compact Panel Connection Diagram 5 - 14<br />

5.3 Multiplexer Module 5 - 15<br />

5.3.1 General 5 - 15<br />

5.3.2 Module Connection Diagram 5 - 15<br />

5.4 Rack Interconnections 5 - 16<br />

5.4.1 Two-Slot Extension Rack - General 5 - 16<br />

5.4.2 Rack Interconnection Diagram 5 - 17<br />

5.4.3 Adjustment of the Transmit Power 5 - 19<br />

5.4.3.1 130 W Power Supply, Main Racks <strong>and</strong><br />

12-Slot Extension Racks 5 - 19<br />

5.4.3.2 60 W Power Supply, Main Racks <strong>and</strong><br />

12-Slot Extension Racks 5 - 20<br />

5.4.3.3 Power Supply of the 2-Slot Extension<br />

Racks 5 - 21<br />

5.5 Machine Panel Interconnections 5 - 22<br />

5.5.1 General 5 - 22<br />

5.5.2 Machine Panel Interconnection Diagram 5 - 23<br />

5.5.3 Adjustment of the Transmit Power 5 - 24<br />

5.5.4 Machine Panel Extension 5 - 25<br />

5.5.4.1 General 5 - 25<br />

5.5.4.2 Connection Diagram of the Machine<br />

Panel Extension with Remote Modules 5 - 26<br />

5.5.4.3 Machine Panel Extension Connection<br />

Diagram without Remote Modules 5 - 27<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 1<br />

5


5.6 NUM Diskette Drive 5 - 28<br />

5.6.1 General 5 - 28<br />

5.6.2 Connections of the NUM Diskette Drive 5 - 28<br />

5.6.2.1 Connection of the NUM Diskette Drive<br />

to an RS 232 Line 5 - 28<br />

5.6.2.2 Connection of the NUM Diskette Drive<br />

with a Remote RS 232 Line 5 - 29<br />

5.6.2.3 Connection of the NUM Diskette Drive<br />

to an RS 422 Line 5 - 29<br />

5.6.2.4 Connection of the NUM Diskette Drive<br />

with a Remote RS 422 Line 5 - 30<br />

5 - 2 en-938816/5


5.1 <strong>CN</strong>C/Peripheral Interconnections<br />

5.1.1 Basic Configuration<br />

PC<br />

Machine-tool<br />

Power cabinet<br />

Automatic controls<br />

Diskette<br />

drive Tape<br />

reader/<br />

punch<br />

Peripheral devices<br />

Inputs/outputs cards<br />

H<strong>and</strong>wheel<br />

Sensor<br />

Motor<br />

Axis card<br />

Axis card<br />

Printer Computer<br />

DNC<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C processor card<br />

Memory card<br />

Machine processor card<br />

Graphic processor card<br />

Servo-drive<br />

Power supply card<br />

Interconnections<br />

Compact panel<br />

or<br />

QWERTY panel<br />

or<br />

50-key panel<br />

1 to 4<br />

machine panels<br />

Analogue<br />

inputs/outputs<br />

External interrupts<br />

NUM <strong>and</strong> customer<br />

applications<br />

REMARK The use of the compact panel precludes the use of a machine panel.<br />

en-938816/4 5 - 3<br />

5


5.1.2 Video Connection for the Basic Configuration<br />

5 - 4 en-938816/4<br />

1<br />

2 3<br />

1 - Graphic processor or UC SII<br />

2 - Video/panel cable (for lengths, see table)<br />

3 - <strong>CN</strong>C panel or compact panel.<br />

The minimum curve radius of the video cable is 110 mm.<br />

The video-panel cables are available in two versions:<br />

- video interconnection kit (for wiring, see 7.6),<br />

- video cable assembly.<br />

Video interconnection kit:<br />

Length Marking Length Marking<br />

5 m ∗ 206203223 30 m 206203231<br />

10 m ∗ 206203225 40 m 206203233<br />

15 m 206203227 to order 206203235<br />

20 m 206203229<br />

∗ Only 5 m <strong>and</strong> 10 m cable lengths can be used with the compact panel.<br />

Video cable assemblies:<br />

Length Marking Length Marking<br />

5 m 206202394 10 m 206202395


5.1.3 Multirack Configuration<br />

Differences with respect to the basic configuration:<br />

Main rack<br />

Machine-tool<br />

Power cabinet<br />

Automatic controls<br />

Extension racks<br />

Fibre-optc ring<br />

REMARK This configuration is only possible with a Series I system.<br />

Interconnections<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 5<br />

5


5.1.4 Multipanel Configuration (2 to 4)<br />

Differences with respect to the basic or multirack configuration:<br />

5<br />

Operator panel 1<br />

or<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C<br />

5 - 6 en-938816/5<br />

or<br />

Operator panel 2<br />

or<br />

1<br />

or<br />

2<br />

Operator panel 3<br />

or<br />

Minimum video cable<br />

curve radius: 110 mm<br />

Operator panel 4<br />

1 - Graphic processor card or UCSII<br />

2 - 50 cm video cables: 1, 2 or 3 (P/N 206 202 620)<br />

3 - Multiplexer modules: 1, 2 or 3<br />

4 - Caps: 3 per multiplexer module on connectors <strong>CN</strong>1, <strong>CN</strong>2<br />

<strong>and</strong> <strong>CN</strong>3<br />

5 - Video cables: 2, 3 or 4 (see 5.1.2)<br />

REMARK This configuration is not possible with 50-key LCD or compact panels.<br />

or<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5


5.1.5 Multi-<strong>CN</strong>C Configuration<br />

Differences with respect to the basic or multirack configuration:<br />

5<br />

4<br />

2 2<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C4<br />

3<br />

Operator panel<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C3<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C2<br />

1 - 50 cm video cable (P/N 206 202 620)<br />

2 - Video cables: 2, 3 or 4 (see 5.1.2)<br />

3 - Graphic processor card or UCSII<br />

4 - Caps on unused connectors: 1, 2 or 3<br />

5 - Multiplexer module<br />

1<br />

Minimum video cable<br />

curve radius: 110 mm<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C1<br />

REMARK This configuration is not possible with 50-key LCD or compact panels.<br />

Interconnections<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 7<br />

5


5.2 Operator Panel<br />

5.2.1 <strong>CN</strong>C Panels with CRT<br />

5.2.1.1 General<br />

5 - 8 en-938816/5<br />

!<br />

1<br />

F1<br />

@<br />

2<br />

F2<br />

#<br />

3<br />

F3<br />

F4<br />

F5<br />

QWERTY panel<br />

ESC Q W E R T Y U I O P<br />

CTRL A S<br />

x off<br />

D F G H J K L<br />

F6<br />

SHIFT Z X C V B N M<br />

< > ?<br />

SPACE<br />

, . /<br />

/<br />

$<br />

4<br />

%<br />

5<br />

^<br />

6<br />

&<br />

7<br />

*<br />

8<br />

F7<br />

(<br />

9<br />

F8<br />

)<br />

0<br />

F9<br />

_<br />

-<br />

:<br />

;<br />

F10<br />

+<br />

= +<br />

{<br />

[<br />

50-key panel<br />

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12<br />

"<br />

`<br />

}<br />

]<br />

`<br />

ALL<br />

CAPS<br />

TOOL JOG<br />

MODE<br />

F11 F12 HELP<br />

N G H<br />

X A<br />

Y B<br />

U :<br />

{<br />

F '<br />

_<br />

;<br />

I<br />

?<br />

S<br />

x off<br />

V (<br />

J )<br />

} T ,<br />

[<br />

Z W K<br />

C<br />

]<br />

"<br />

P<br />

D<br />

1 2 3<br />

Q<br />

R<br />

SHIFT CTRL<br />

E<br />

L<br />

HELP MODE TOOL JOG<br />

+<br />

SPACE<br />

0<br />

M<br />

1<br />

line<br />

INS<br />

char<br />

M01<br />

home Pg Up<br />

end<br />

7 &<br />

3<br />

line<br />

DEL<br />

char<br />

VALID<br />

2 4<br />

Pg Dn<br />

\ ~<br />

8 9<br />

S<br />

4 5 6<br />

Panel type CRT type Maximum CRT power consumption<br />

QWERTY panel 14" colour 100 W<br />

50-key panel 10" colour 60 W<br />

9" monochrome 30 W<br />

Power supply 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz<br />

The operator panel provides the operator/system interface:<br />

- display unit,<br />

- keyboard for user actions.<br />

The operator panel communicates with the <strong>CN</strong>C processor card via a video cable (via the multiplexer module in<br />

multipanel <strong>and</strong> multi-<strong>CN</strong>C configurations).<br />

1 !<br />

∗<br />

INS/<br />

OVER<br />

line<br />

DEL<br />

char<br />

2 @<br />

3 #<br />

= /<br />

0<br />

ENTER<br />

home<br />

PgUp<br />

end<br />

PgDn


5.2.1.2 Operator Panel Connection Diagram<br />

3<br />

1 - Monitor video cable<br />

2 - Power cable (see 7.5.1)<br />

3 - Video cable<br />

2<br />

Interconnections<br />

1<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 9<br />

5


5.2.2 50-Key Panel with LCD<br />

5.2.2.1 General<br />

5 - 10 en-938816/5<br />

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12<br />

N G H<br />

X A<br />

Y B<br />

U :<br />

{<br />

F '<br />

_<br />

;<br />

I<br />

?<br />

S<br />

x off<br />

V (<br />

J )<br />

} T ,<br />

[<br />

Z W K<br />

C<br />

]<br />

"<br />

P<br />

D<br />

1 2 3<br />

Q<br />

R<br />

SHIFT CTRL<br />

E<br />

L<br />

HELP MODE TOOL JOG<br />

50-key LCD panel 10.4" colour TFT LCD<br />

Power supply 24 VDC<br />

Maximum LCD power consumption 20 W<br />

The panel provides the interface between the user <strong>and</strong> system:<br />

- display on LCD,<br />

- user actions on the keyboard.<br />

The panel communicates with the CPU via a video cable.<br />

+<br />

SPACE<br />

0<br />

M<br />

7 &<br />

\ ~<br />

8 9<br />

S<br />

4 5 6<br />

1 !<br />

∗<br />

INS/<br />

OVER<br />

line<br />

DEL<br />

char<br />

2 @<br />

3 #<br />

= /<br />

0<br />

ENTER<br />

home<br />

PgUp<br />

end<br />

PgDn


5.2.2.2 Panel Connection Diagram<br />

1<br />

24 VDC<br />

power supply<br />

Interconnections<br />

2 3<br />

M5 hole<br />

1 - Power cable (see 7.5.5)<br />

2 - 2 m LCD video cable (supplied)<br />

3 - 2 m LCD/keyboard cable (supplied)<br />

4 - Video cable<br />

M5 hole<br />

4<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 11<br />

5


5.2.3 Compact Panel<br />

5.2.3.1 General<br />

5 - 12 en-938816/5<br />

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12<br />

Compact panel CRT type Maximum CRT power consumption<br />

10" colour 60 W<br />

9" monochrome 30 W<br />

Power supply 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz<br />

The compact panel provides the operator/system interface.<br />

It communicates with the CPU by a video cable.<br />

The compact panel provides the following functions:<br />

- display on the CRT,<br />

- access to the <strong>CN</strong>C menus,<br />

- axis control,<br />

- settings (homing, etc.),<br />

- running of programmes or MDI blocks (cycle start, cycle stop),<br />

- special functions by programmable keys,<br />

- turning on the machine,<br />

- feed rate override by potentiometer,<br />

- emergency stop,<br />

- remote serial line (wiring optional).<br />

5.2.3.2 Connection of a 102-Key Keyboard<br />

A st<strong>and</strong>ard 102-key PC keyboard can be connected to the front of the compact panel by removing the blanking plate<br />

(or to the rear if the DIN connector was moved to the rear, see Sec. 4.2.2), for instance to edit or create part<br />

programmes.<br />

G %<br />

7 N<br />

4 X<br />

1 A<br />

D P<br />

M E<br />

8 S<br />

5 Y<br />

2 B<br />

0 Q<br />

a<br />

/ F<br />

9 T<br />

6 Z<br />

3 C<br />

. R<br />

! CAUTION<br />

The keyboard should not be connected permanently to the front panel, because the seal is<br />

broken when the blanking plate is removed. For a permanent connection, move the<br />

connector to the rear of the panel.<br />

x H<br />

- =<br />

+ !


NUM Keyboard<br />

Keyboard type US QWERTY, 102 keys<br />

Seal IP54 on the front, IP20 at the rear<br />

Other Keyboards Connectable to the Compact Panel<br />

To be connectable, the keyboard must have the following characteristics:<br />

- US QWERTY, French AZERTY or German QWERTZ 102-key IBM PC/AT compatible keyboard<br />

- Connection by male 5-contact DIN connector<br />

- Maximum current draw 150 mA.<br />

Keyboards tested by NUM<br />

The following keyboards have been tested <strong>and</strong> found to operate correctly:<br />

- Cherry RS3000, RS6000 <strong>and</strong> MY3000<br />

- Tanguy AKB2000<br />

- Mitsumi KPQ E99ZC-12.<br />

Compaq keyboards are unsuitable because they use different protocols.<br />

Interconnections<br />

Declaring the Keyboard<br />

The keyboard connected must be declared by a key combination. The type is then stored. The US QWERTY keyboard<br />

is the default system keyboard.<br />

Keyboard type Key combination (digit to be entered from the numerical keypad)<br />

US QWERTY "Scroll lock" then "0"<br />

French AZERTY "Arrêt défilement" then "1"<br />

German QWERTZ "Roll" then "2"<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 13<br />

5


5.2.3.3 Compact Panel Connection Diagram<br />

1<br />

7<br />

6<br />

Daisy<br />

chain<br />

5 - 14 en-938816/5<br />

2 3<br />

5 4<br />

Rear of the compact panel<br />

1 - Emergency stop cable (Telemecanique P/N XB2-BS542)<br />

2 - Video cable<br />

3 - CRT video cable<br />

4 - Power supply cable (see 7.5.1)<br />

5 - Keyboard cable (front or back)<br />

6 - Serial line relay cable:<br />

- RS 232 line (see 7.1.7.1)<br />

- RS 422 or 485 line (see 7.1.7.2)<br />

7 - Power-on pushbutton cable (P/N ZB2-BW061)


5.3 Multiplexer Module<br />

5.3.1 General<br />

PUP. LOCAL<br />

PUP. DEPORTE<br />

<strong>CN</strong>4<br />

<strong>CN</strong>3<br />

<strong>CN</strong>2 / TSX40<br />

<strong>CN</strong>1<br />

IMPR. TSX40<br />

-5V +5V<br />

Interconnections<br />

Power consumption 25 W<br />

Location On the rear of the operator panel or external<br />

The multiplexer module is used to link two to four operator panels with one <strong>CN</strong>C (see 5.1.4) or two to four <strong>CN</strong>Cs with<br />

one operator panel (see 5.1.5).<br />

5.3.2 Module Connection Diagram<br />

1 - Power cable (see 7.5.1)<br />

1<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 15<br />

5


5.4 Rack Interconnections<br />

The racks <strong>and</strong> machine panels are interconnected by a fibre-optic ring.<br />

The transmit power must be adjusted according to the length of the fibre-optic cable interconnecting the transmitter<br />

of one unit to the receiver of the next unit (see 5.4.3).<br />

REMARK The rack location in the fibre-optic ring is unimportant, since only the addresses<br />

assigned to the racks on the thumbwheels are taken into account (see 4.1.4).<br />

5.4.1 Two-Slot Extension Rack - General<br />

Power consumption<br />

Current ratings<br />

23 W maximum<br />

5 V 600 mA<br />

+ 24 VI (bus) 500 mA<br />

+ 24 VE (external) 400 mA<br />

The rack power supply card provides the voltage outputs used by the input/output cards installed <strong>and</strong> voltage VE used<br />

by the inputs.<br />

The fibre-optic module included with the power supply card h<strong>and</strong>les data transfers with the main rack.<br />

5 - 16 en-938816/5


5.4.2 Rack Interconnection Diagram<br />

Main Rack <strong>and</strong> 12-Slot Extension Racks.<br />

Tx<br />

4<br />

1<br />

1 - Power cable (see 7.5.1)<br />

2 - Receiver of next unit<br />

3 - Fibre-optic cable<br />

4 - Transmitter of previous unit<br />

3<br />

Tx<br />

Rx<br />

Minimum fibre-optic<br />

cable bend<br />

radius: 50 mm<br />

Interconnections<br />

2<br />

Rx<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 17<br />

5


Two-Slot Extension Rack<br />

1<br />

Tx<br />

5 - 18 en-938816/5<br />

Minimum fibre-optic<br />

cable bend<br />

radius: 50 mm<br />

Tx<br />

Rx<br />

1 - Transmitter of previous unit<br />

2 - Receiver of next unit<br />

3 - Fibre-optic cable<br />

4 - Power supply cable (see 7.5.1)<br />

4<br />

3<br />

2<br />

Rx


5.4.3 Adjustment of the Transmit Power<br />

5.4.3.1 130 W Power Supply, Main Racks <strong>and</strong> 12-Slot Extension Racks<br />

Power supply card<br />

Length of the fibre-optic cable for transmission Switch settings<br />

L ≤ 15 m<br />

15 m < L ≤ 30 m<br />

L > 30 m<br />

3 2 1<br />

3 2 1<br />

3 2 1<br />

ON<br />

ON<br />

ON<br />

1 2 3<br />

ON<br />

Interconnections<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 19<br />

5


5.4.3.2 60 W Power Supply, Main Racks <strong>and</strong> 12-Slot Extension Racks<br />

5 - 20 en-938816/5<br />

Power supply card<br />

Length of the fibre-optic cable for transmission Switch settings<br />

L ≤ 15 m<br />

15 m < L ≤ 30 m<br />

L > 30 m<br />

ON OFF<br />

ON OFF<br />

ON OFF<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

ON OFF<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3


5.4.3.3 Power Supply of the 2-Slot Extension Racks<br />

Power supply card<br />

Length of the fibre-optic cable for transmission Switch settings<br />

L ≤ 5 m<br />

15 m < L ≤ 30 m<br />

L > 30 m<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

ON<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

ON<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

ON<br />

1 2 3<br />

ON<br />

Interconnections<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 21<br />

5


5.5 Machine Panel Interconnections<br />

The racks <strong>and</strong> machine panels are interconnected by a fibre-optic ring.<br />

The transmit power must be adjusted according to the length of the fibre-optic cable interconnecting the transmitter<br />

of one unit to the receiver of the next unit (see 5.5.3).<br />

REMARK The machine panel location in the fibre-optic ring is unimportant, since only the<br />

addresses assigned to the racks on the thumbwheels are taken into account<br />

(see 4.3.1).<br />

5.5.1 General<br />

5 - 22 en-938816/5<br />

X 1 10 100 1000 10000 ILL<br />

Y<br />

Z<br />

4<br />

5<br />

X-<br />

Y+ 5+ Z+<br />

X+ 4+ 4-<br />

Y- 5- Z-<br />

Power consumption 3.8 W maximum<br />

Maximum current rating 500 mA<br />

Nominal voltage 24 VDC (external power supply)<br />

Limit values 17 V minimum<br />

30 V maximum<br />

The machine panel provides the following functions:<br />

- axis JOG<br />

- execution (cycle, feed stop, axis recall, M01 enable <strong>and</strong> block skip)<br />

- feed rate <strong>and</strong> spindle speed override by potentiometer<br />

- mode locking by key<br />

- emergency stop<br />

- remote connection for the RS 232 peripheral serial line (wiring optional)<br />

- axis control by h<strong>and</strong>wheel (optional).<br />

Other functions can also be provided on the machine panel using the unassigned keys <strong>and</strong> indicator lights.<br />

Thirty-two additional inputs <strong>and</strong> 24 additional outputs can be added by means of a machine panel extension card.<br />

The machine panel is connected by fibre-optic cable to the machine processor via the serial bus.<br />

X<br />

M01<br />

Z<br />

CYCLE<br />

START<br />

CYCLE<br />

STOP


5.5.2 Machine Panel Interconnection Diagram<br />

Rx<br />

3<br />

24 VDC<br />

external<br />

power supply<br />

Minimum curve radius:<br />

50 mm<br />

2<br />

Tx<br />

Rx<br />

Tx<br />

1<br />

Rear of the machine panel<br />

4 5<br />

1 - Transmitter of the previous unit<br />

2 - Fibre-optic cable<br />

3 - Receiver of the next unit<br />

4 - Power supply cable (see 7.5.3)<br />

5 - H<strong>and</strong>wheel cable (see 6.5.4)<br />

6 - Emergency stop cable (P/N XB2-BS542)<br />

7 - Relay cable of a serial line:<br />

- RS 232 (see 7.1.8.1)<br />

- RS 422 or 485 (see 7.1.8.2)<br />

7<br />

Interconnections<br />

Customer<br />

safety<br />

chain<br />

6<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 23<br />

5


5.5.3 Adjustment of the Transmit Power<br />

5 - 24 en-938816/5<br />

Rear of the machine panel<br />

Length of the fibre-optic cable for transmission Switch settings<br />

L ≤ 15 m<br />

15 m < L ≤ 30 m<br />

L > 30 m<br />

ON<br />

1 2 3<br />

ON<br />

3<br />

2<br />

1<br />

ON<br />

3<br />

2<br />

1<br />

ON<br />

3<br />

2<br />

1


5.5.4 Machine Panel Extension<br />

5.5.4.1 General<br />

Power consumption 10 W maximum (all I/O switched)<br />

Maximum current rating 520 mA<br />

Location at the rear of the machine panel<br />

Nominal voltage 24 VDC (external power supply)<br />

Limit values 15 V minimum<br />

30 V maximum<br />

Inputs<br />

32 discrete inputs<br />

Current rating 12.8 per input<br />

Ranges low level: 0-5 V<br />

high level: 11-30<br />

Input impedance 2060 Ω<br />

Outputs<br />

Interconnections<br />

24 open-collector discrete outputs<br />

Maximum current rating 200 mA<br />

Protection short circuit<br />

inductive overvoltage<br />

The machine panel extension is designed for logic data transfers with a second machine panel specific to the customer<br />

<strong>and</strong> the machine processor card via the NUM machine panel.<br />

The machine panel extension can:<br />

- communicate with the machine processor card via the NUM machine panel <strong>and</strong> the fibre-optic link,<br />

- receive input signals (pushbuttons) via the 32-input connector,<br />

- send output signals (indicator lights) via the 24-output connector.<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 25<br />

5


5.5.4.2 Connection Diagram of the Machine Panel Extension with Remote Modules<br />

1<br />

6<br />

5<br />

5 - 26 en-938816/5<br />

Rear of the machine panel<br />

MOD. INTERFACE 32 E<br />

External<br />

24 VDC<br />

power supply<br />

4<br />

1 - Machine panel extension/remote module connecting cable:<br />

- Length 1 m (P/N 263 202 928)<br />

- Length 2 m (P/N 263 202 929)<br />

2 - 24-output relay module (P/N 263 900 002, see 6.11.2;<br />

P/N 263 202 931, see 6.11.3)<br />

3 - Power supply via the relay module (excludes power<br />

supply via the central connector or the interface module)<br />

4 - Power cable (see 7.5.3: excludes power supply via the<br />

relay module or the interface module)<br />

5 - Power supply via the interface module (excludes power<br />

supply via the central connector or the relay module)<br />

6 - 32-input interface module (P/N 263 900 001, see 6.10.2;<br />

P/N 263 202 926, see 6.10.3)<br />

REMARK The power supply must be provided to the machine panel extension by one <strong>and</strong> only<br />

one of items 3, 4 or 5.<br />

3<br />

MOD. RELAYAGE 24 S<br />

1<br />

2


5.5.4.3 Machine Panel Extension Connection Diagram without Remote Modules<br />

3<br />

External<br />

power supply<br />

24 VDC<br />

Input<br />

(pushbuttons)<br />

Rear of the machine panel<br />

External<br />

power supply<br />

24 VDC<br />

2<br />

1 - 24-output cable with or without power supply (see 7.4.6)<br />

2 - Power cable (only when the general power supply is not<br />

provided by the input or output cable: see 7.5.3)<br />

3 - 32-input cable with or without general power supply (see 7.4.4)<br />

1<br />

Interconnections<br />

External<br />

power supply<br />

24 VDC<br />

Outputs<br />

(indicator<br />

lights)<br />

REMARK The power supply must be provided to the machine panel extension by one <strong>and</strong> only<br />

one of cables 1, 2 or 3.<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 27<br />

5


5.6 NUM Diskette Drive<br />

5.6.1 General<br />

Power consumption 3.5 W maximum<br />

Nominal voltage 24 VDC (external power supply)<br />

Limit values 19.2 V minimum<br />

30 V maximum<br />

5.6.2 Connections of the NUM Diskette Drive<br />

5.6.2.1 Connection of the NUM Diskette Drive to an RS 232 Line<br />

5 - 28 en-938816/5<br />

1 2 3 4<br />

≤ 10 m<br />

24 V<br />

1 - RS 232 line<br />

2 - RS 232 serial interface cable (see 7.1.9)<br />

3 - Drive power cable (see 7.5.4)<br />

4 - NUM diskette drive<br />

REMARK The serial line must be configured using the serial line parameter setting utility (see<br />

Operator Manual). The line parameters must be set for st<strong>and</strong>ard RS 422.


5.6.2.2 Connection of the NUM Diskette Drive with a Remote RS 232 Line<br />

24 V<br />

1 2<br />

3 4 5<br />

≤ 10 m<br />

24 V<br />

1 - RS 232 line<br />

2 - Cable for remote RS 232 line with or without power supply:<br />

- to compact panel (see 7.1.7.1)<br />

- to machine panel (see 7.1.8.1)<br />

3 - RS 232 serial interface cable (see 7.1.9) or cable supplied<br />

(P/N 206 203 324, only on machine panel)<br />

4 - Drive power supply cable (only when cable (2) does not<br />

provide the power supply: see 7.5.4)<br />

5 - NUM diskette drive<br />

Interconnections<br />

REMARK The serial line must be configured using the serial line parameter setting utility (see<br />

Operator Manual). The line parameters must be set for st<strong>and</strong>ard RS 422.<br />

5.6.2.3 Connection of the NUM Diskette Drive to an RS 422 Line<br />

1 2 3 4<br />

≤ 40 m<br />

24 V<br />

1 - RS 422 line<br />

2 - RS 422 serial interface cable (see 7.1.10)<br />

3 - Drive power cable (see 7.5.4)<br />

4 - NUM diskette drive<br />

REMARK The serial line must be configured using the serial line parameter setting utility (see<br />

Operator Manual). The line parameters must be set for st<strong>and</strong>ard RS 422.<br />

en-938816/5 5 - 29<br />

5


5.6.2.4 Connection of the NUM Diskette Drive with a Remote RS 422 Line<br />

5 - 30 en-938816/5<br />

24 V<br />

1 2<br />

3 4 5<br />

≤ 40 m<br />

24 V<br />

1 - RS 422 line<br />

2 - Cable for remote RS 422 line with or without power supply:<br />

- to compact panel (see 7.1.7.2)<br />

- to machine panel (see 7.1.8.2)<br />

3 - RS 422 serial interface cable (see 7.1.10) or cable<br />

supplied (P/N 206 203 324, only on machine panel)<br />

4 - Drive power supply cable (only when cable (2) does not<br />

provide the power supply: see 7.5.4)<br />

5 - NUM diskette drive<br />

REMARK The serial line must be configured using the serial line parameter setting utility (see<br />

Operator Manual). The line parameters must be set for st<strong>and</strong>ard RS 422.


Cards<br />

6 Cards<br />

6.1 Power Supply Cards 6 - 5<br />

6.1.1 130 W Power Supply Card 6 - 5<br />

6.1.2 60 W Power Supply Card 6 - 6<br />

6.2 <strong>1060</strong> Series II CPU 6 - 7<br />

6.2.1 UC SII CPU 6 - 7<br />

6.2.1.1 General 6 - 7<br />

6.2.1.2 UC SII CPU Connection Diagram 6 - 9<br />

6.2.2 Biprocessor CPU 6 - 10<br />

6.3 <strong>1060</strong> Series I Processor 6 - 11<br />

6.4 CPU Cards 6 - 12<br />

6.4.1 <strong>CN</strong>C/Graphic Processor Card 6 - 12<br />

6.4.2 Graphic Processor Card 6 - 13<br />

6.4.3 Memory Card 6 - 14<br />

6.4.4 Machine Processor Card 6 - 15<br />

6.4.4.1 Version 2 Machine Processor Card 6 - 15<br />

6.4.4.2 Version 1 Machine Processor Card 6 - 17<br />

6.4.5 <strong>CN</strong>C Processor 6 - 19<br />

6.4.5.1 Version 2 <strong>CN</strong>C Processor 6 - 19<br />

6.4.4.2 Version 1 <strong>CN</strong>C Processor Card 6 - 22<br />

6.5 Incremental <strong>and</strong> Absolute Axis Measurement Card 6 - 24<br />

6.5.1 General 6 - 24<br />

6.5.2 Data Concerning the Sensors <strong>and</strong> Their<br />

Power Supply 6 - 25<br />

6.5.2.1 Voltage Across the Sensor 6 - 25<br />

6.5.2.2 Maximum Sensor Channel Output<br />

Frequency 6 - 26<br />

6.5.2.3 Setting the Reference Signal (Rulers with<br />

Distance-Coded Reference Marks) 6 - 27<br />

6.5.2.4 Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI)<br />

Timing Diagram 6 - 27<br />

6.5.2.5 Maximum Current Available per Axis<br />

Encoder Card 6 - 27<br />

6.5.2.6 Datum Switch Setting<br />

(Incremental Sensors) 6 - 28<br />

6.5.2.7 Setting the Origin Switch (SSI or Combined<br />

Sensor with Semiabsolute Measurement) 6 - 29<br />

6.5.2.8 Homing of SSI or Combined Sensors<br />

with Absolute Measurement 6 - 29<br />

6.5.3 Axis Card Connection Diagram 6 - 30<br />

6.5.4 H<strong>and</strong>wheel Connection Diagram 6 - 31<br />

6.6 IT/Serial Line Card 6 - 32<br />

6.6.1 General 6 - 32<br />

6.6.2 IT/Serial Line Connection Diagram 6 - 33<br />

6.7 Analogue Input/Output Card 6 - 34<br />

6.7.1 General 6 - 34<br />

6.7.2 Analogue Input/Output Connection<br />

Diagram 6 - 35<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 1<br />

6


6.8 32-24 I/O <strong>and</strong> 64-48 I/O Cards 6 - 36<br />

6.8.1 Characteristics of the 32-24 I/O <strong>and</strong><br />

64-48 I/O Cards 6 - 36<br />

6.8.2 32-24 I/O Card Connection 6 - 38<br />

6.8.2.1 32-24 I/O Card Connection Diagram<br />

with Remote Modules 6 - 38<br />

6.8.2.2 32-24 I/O Card Connection Diagram 6 - 39<br />

6.8.3 64-48 I/O Card Connection 6 - 40<br />

6.8.3.1 64-48 I/O Card Connection Diagram<br />

with Remote Modules 6 - 40<br />

6.8.3.2 64-48 I/O Card Connection Diagram 6 - 41<br />

6.9 32-Input/24-Output Card 6 - 42<br />

6.9.1 General 6 - 42<br />

6.9.2 32-Input/24-Output Card Connection<br />

Diagram with Remote Modules 6 - 44<br />

6.9.3 32-Input/24-Output Card Connection<br />

Diagram 6 - 45<br />

6.10 32-Input Interface Modules 6 - 46<br />

6.10.1 Characteristics of the Interface Modules 6 - 46<br />

6.10.2 Wiring <strong>and</strong> Customising of Interface<br />

Module P/N 263 900 001 6 - 47<br />

6.10.2.1 Wiring of the Inputs <strong>and</strong> Power Supply 6 - 47<br />

6.10.2.2 Customising the Interface Module -<br />

Correspondence with Ladder Notation 6 - 48<br />

6.10.3 Wiring of Interface Module<br />

P/N 263 202 926 6 - 49<br />

6.10.3.1 Wiring of the Inputs <strong>and</strong> Power Supply 6 - 49<br />

6.10.3.2 Correspondence with Ladder Notation 6 - 49<br />

6.11 24-Output Relay Modules 6 - 50<br />

6.11.1 Relay Module Characteristics 6 - 50<br />

6.11.1.1 Characteristics of the Relays 6 - 51<br />

6.11.1.2 Electrical Endurance According to the Load 6 - 51<br />

6.11.1.3 Derating Curve 6 - 52<br />

6.11.2 Wiring <strong>and</strong> Customising of Relay<br />

Module P/N 263 900 002 6 - 52<br />

6.11.2.1 Wiring of the Outputs <strong>and</strong> Power Supply 6 - 53<br />

6.11.2.2 Customising the Relay Module -<br />

Correspondence with Ladder Notation 6 - 53<br />

6.11.3 Wiring of Relay Module P/N 263 202 931 6 - 54<br />

6.11.3.1 Wiring of the Outputs <strong>and</strong> Power Supply 6 - 54<br />

6.11.3.2 Power Supply Wiring <strong>and</strong> Positioning<br />

of the Straps 6 - 54<br />

6.11.3.3 Correspondence with Ladder Notation 6 - 55<br />

6.12 32-Input Card 6 - 56<br />

6.12.1 32-Input Card with Trelec Connectors 6 - 56<br />

6.12.2 32-Input Card with LMI Connectors 6 - 57<br />

6.12.3 32-Input Card Connection Diagram 6 - 58<br />

6 - 2 en-938816/5


Cards<br />

6.13 32-Output Card 6 - 59<br />

6.13.1 General 6 - 59<br />

6.13.2 32-Output Card with LMI Connectors 6 - 60<br />

6.13.3 Output Characteristics 6 - 61<br />

6.13.3.1 Electrical Characteristics 6 - 61<br />

6.13.3.2 Electrical Endurance According to the<br />

Load 6 - 61<br />

6.13.4 32-Output Card Connection Diagram 6 - 62<br />

6.13.4.1 Wiring of the 32-Output Card with Trelec<br />

Connector 6 - 62<br />

6.13.4.2 Wiring of the 32-Output Card with LMI<br />

Connector 6 - 63<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 3<br />

6


6 - 4 en-938816/4


6.1 Power Supply Cards<br />

6.1.1 130 W Power Supply Card<br />

+24VI<br />

+15V<br />

+5V<br />

+24VE<br />

-15V<br />

Pw Fail<br />

RaZ<br />

24 VE<br />

0 VE<br />

Alim<br />

F/O<br />

Em<br />

Rec<br />

Cards<br />

Power consumption<br />

(power supply + bus card) 45 W maximum<br />

Slot on the right of the rack (see 4.1.1 <strong>and</strong> 4.1.2)<br />

Available current<br />

+ 5 V 25 A<br />

+ 15 V 500 mA<br />

- 15 V 500 mA<br />

+ 24 VI (bus) 2 A<br />

+ 24 VE (external) 2 A<br />

The power supply card provides the voltage outputs used by the system (except for<br />

the monitor <strong>and</strong> multiplexer module).<br />

In the case of a multirack configuration, the fibre-optic module built into the power<br />

supply card is used for data transfers between racks.<br />

Components supplied by the card:<br />

- the <strong>CN</strong>C cards <strong>and</strong> operator panel card (via the graphic processor) via the system<br />

bus,<br />

- the input/output cards via the PLC bus,<br />

- the inputs via the 24 VE connector on the front of the card.<br />

The power supply card exchanges data with:<br />

- the processor cards via the system bus,<br />

- the machine processor card <strong>and</strong> input/output cards via the PLC bus,<br />

- the other racks in the case of multirack systems via the fibre-optic modules,<br />

- the machine panels via the fibre-optic modules.<br />

en-938816/4 6 - 5<br />

6


6.1.2 60 W Power Supply Card<br />

F/O<br />

+5V<br />

+15V<br />

-15V<br />

PwFail<br />

RaZ<br />

Em<br />

Rec<br />

Alim<br />

6 - 6 en-938816/4<br />

Power consumption<br />

(power supply + bus card) 28 W maximum<br />

Slot on the right of the rack (see 4.1.1 <strong>and</strong> 4.1.2)<br />

Available current<br />

+ 5 V 10A<br />

+ 15 V 250 mA<br />

- 15 V 250 mA<br />

The power supply card provides the voltage outputs used by the system (except for<br />

the monitor <strong>and</strong> multiplexer module).<br />

In the case of a multirack configuration, the fibre-optic module built into the power<br />

supply card is used for data transfers between racks.<br />

Components supplied by the card:<br />

- the <strong>CN</strong>C cards <strong>and</strong> operator panel card (via the graphic processor) via the system<br />

bus,<br />

- the input/output cards via the PLC bus.<br />

The power supply card exchanges data with:<br />

- the processor cards via the system bus,<br />

- the machine processor card <strong>and</strong> input/output cards via the PLC bus,<br />

- the other racks in the case of multirack systems via the fibre-optic modules,<br />

- the machine panels via the fibre-optic modules.


6.2 <strong>1060</strong> Series II CPU<br />

The <strong>1060</strong> Series II CPU is available in two versions:<br />

- UC SII CPU<br />

- biprocessor CPU.<br />

6.2.1 UC SII CPU<br />

6.2.1.1 General<br />

C<br />

O<br />

M<br />

M<br />

1<br />

C<br />

O<br />

M<br />

M<br />

2<br />

E<br />

/<br />

S<br />

L<br />

I<br />

A<br />

I<br />

S<br />

O<br />

N<br />

P<br />

U<br />

P<br />

I<br />

T<br />

R<br />

E<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

A<br />

N<br />

A<br />

L<br />

O<br />

G<br />

UC SII<br />

Power consumption 11 W maximum<br />

Location Slots 0 <strong>and</strong> 1 of the <strong>CN</strong>C cards (see 4.1.1)<br />

Serial Lines<br />

2 RS 232 serial lines<br />

Maximum input voltage ± 30 V<br />

V OL typical - 9 V<br />

V OH typical + 9 V<br />

Maximum loads 2000 pF, 5 kΩ (approximately 10 m of cable)<br />

Data rate 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400<br />

bauds<br />

Analogue Inputs<br />

The inputs can be dedicated to connection of resistive potentiometers<br />

Typical potentiometer rating 1 kΩ<br />

Resolution 0.4 percent full scale<br />

Input voltage 0 / 5 V<br />

Analogue Output<br />

Output voltage - 10 / + 10 V<br />

Maximum load 2 kΩ<br />

Maximum error 20 mV (offset + accuracy)<br />

Output amplifier AD712 (Analog Device)<br />

External interrupt<br />

Cards<br />

Maximum current draw 20 mA<br />

Minimum current rating 10 mA<br />

Input on 5 V Logic 0 between 0 <strong>and</strong> 1 V<br />

Logic 1 between 3.5 <strong>and</strong> 5.5 V<br />

Input on 24 V Logic 0 between 0 <strong>and</strong> 4.7 V<br />

Logic 1 between 18 <strong>and</strong> 27 V<br />

IT duration Programmable : T1 = 0.5/250/500/2220/4440 μs<br />

Masking between 2 ITs Programmable : T2 = 1/500/1000/4000/8000 μs<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 7<br />

6


Interrupt timing diagram:<br />

6 - 8 en-938816/4<br />

Rising edge active<br />

Falling edge active<br />

t ≥ T1 t ≥ T2<br />

IT Masking time<br />

The UC SII CPU is a 32-bit 68020 microprocessor-based card.<br />

The UC SII CPU manages:<br />

- the other <strong>CN</strong>C cards via the system bus<br />

- the input/output cards via the serial bus<br />

- the analogue input or output modules via the analogue I/O connector.<br />

The UC SII CPU can communicate with peripherals or a host computer (DNC) via RS 232 serial lines (adaptable to<br />

RS 485) COMM1 <strong>and</strong> COMM2.<br />

The UC SII CPU can receive an interrupt signal on the analogue I/O connector.<br />

PLC Function<br />

The UC SII CPU manages the machine environment (inputs/outputs).<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C Function<br />

The UC SII CPU controls the <strong>CN</strong>C software to manage part programmes <strong>and</strong> machining data, computes tool paths<br />

<strong>and</strong> feed rates <strong>and</strong> controls axis movements.<br />

Panel Management Function<br />

The UC SII CPU controls the CRT <strong>and</strong> keyboard.<br />

Mass Memory Function<br />

The UC SII CPU stores the operating system <strong>and</strong> applications in REPROM, <strong>and</strong> the machine processor programmes<br />

<strong>and</strong> user files in RAM with backup.<br />

File backup in the RAM is provided by a battery with an operating time of 18 months.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

The battery must m<strong>and</strong>atorily be replaced after 18 months of use (connected).<br />

Other Functions<br />

The UC SII CPU also performs system initialisation <strong>and</strong> system bus arbitration functions.


6.2.1.2 UC SII CPU Connection Diagram<br />

Analogue inputs:<br />

spindle speed<br />

<strong>and</strong> feed rate<br />

potentiometers,<br />

temperature<br />

probe<br />

Analogue<br />

process control:<br />

spindle,<br />

flow control<br />

Interrupt<br />

1<br />

C<br />

O<br />

M<br />

M<br />

1<br />

C<br />

O<br />

M<br />

M<br />

2<br />

E<br />

/<br />

S<br />

L<br />

I<br />

A<br />

I<br />

S<br />

O<br />

N<br />

P<br />

U<br />

P<br />

I<br />

T<br />

R<br />

E<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

A<br />

N<br />

A<br />

L<br />

O<br />

G<br />

UC SII<br />

ou<br />

1 - Analogue I/O cable - interrupt (see 7.3.1)<br />

2 - RS 232 serial interface cable (see 7.1.1)<br />

2<br />

Computer<br />

Peripherals<br />

Cards<br />

REMARK The serial lines must be configured using the serial line parameter setting utility<br />

(see Operator Manual).<br />

or<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 9<br />

6


6.2.2 Biprocessor CPU<br />

6 - 10 en-938816/5<br />

Mém<br />

1,5M/2M<br />

1<br />

I<br />

T<br />

.<br />

E<br />

X<br />

T<br />

C<br />

A<br />

N<br />

/<br />

C<br />

N<br />

A<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

RS 232<br />

422/485<br />

RS 232<br />

L<br />

I<br />

A<br />

I<br />

S<br />

O<br />

N<br />

P<br />

U<br />

P<br />

I<br />

T<br />

R<br />

E<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

Proc Mach Proc <strong>CN</strong>/Gr<br />

1 - Memory card (see 6.4.3)<br />

2 - Machine processor (see 6.4.4)<br />

3 - <strong>CN</strong>C/graphic processor (see 6.4.1)<br />

PLC Function<br />

The CPU manages the machine environment (machine processor).<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C Function<br />

The CPU uses the <strong>CN</strong>C software for management of part programmes <strong>and</strong> machining data, computation of the paths<br />

<strong>and</strong> feed rates <strong>and</strong> monitoring of axis movements (<strong>CN</strong>C/graphic processor).<br />

Panel Management Function<br />

The CPU controls the CRT <strong>and</strong> keyboard (<strong>CN</strong>C/graphic processor).<br />

Mass Memory Function<br />

The CPU provides the memory function (memory card).<br />

Other Functions<br />

The CPU also performs system initialisation <strong>and</strong> system bus arbitration functions (<strong>CN</strong>C/graphic processor).<br />

2<br />

3


6.3 <strong>1060</strong> Series I Processor<br />

Mém<br />

1,5M/2M<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

L<br />

H<br />

D<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

RS 232<br />

RS 232<br />

422/485<br />

I<br />

T<br />

.<br />

E<br />

X<br />

T<br />

C<br />

A<br />

N<br />

/<br />

C<br />

N<br />

A<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

RS 232<br />

422/485<br />

RS 232<br />

L<br />

I<br />

A<br />

I<br />

S<br />

O<br />

N<br />

P<br />

U<br />

P<br />

I<br />

T<br />

R<br />

E<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

Proc <strong>CN</strong> Proc Mach Proc Graph<br />

1 2 3 4<br />

1 - Memory card (see 6.4.3)<br />

2 - <strong>CN</strong>C processor (see 6.4.5)<br />

3 - Machine processor (see 6.4.4)<br />

4 - <strong>CN</strong>C/graphic processor (see 6.4.2)<br />

PLC Function<br />

The CPU manages the machine environment (machine processor).<br />

Cards<br />

<strong>CN</strong>C Function<br />

The CPU uses the <strong>CN</strong>C software to management of part programmes <strong>and</strong> machining data, computation of the paths<br />

<strong>and</strong> feed rates <strong>and</strong> monitoring of axis movements (<strong>CN</strong>C processor).<br />

Panel Management Function<br />

The CPU controls the CRT <strong>and</strong> keyboard (graphic processor).<br />

Mass Memory Function<br />

The CPU provides the memory function (memory card).<br />

Other Functions<br />

The CPU also performs system initialisation <strong>and</strong> system bus arbitration functions (graphic processor).<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 11<br />

6


6.4 CPU Cards<br />

6.4.1 <strong>CN</strong>C/Graphic Processor Card<br />

L<br />

I<br />

A<br />

I<br />

S<br />

O<br />

N<br />

P<br />

U<br />

P<br />

I<br />

T<br />

R<br />

E<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

Proc <strong>CN</strong>/Gr<br />

6 - 12 en-938816/4<br />

Power consumption 10.2 W (including the operator panel card)<br />

Location <strong>CN</strong>C card No. 0 (see 4.1.1)<br />

The <strong>CN</strong>C/graphic processor card is a 32-bit processor card built around a 68020<br />

microprocessor.<br />

The <strong>CN</strong>C/graphic processor card can communicate with:<br />

- the other <strong>CN</strong>C cards via the system bus<br />

- the operator panel via the video cable.<br />

The <strong>CN</strong>C/graphic processor card uses the <strong>CN</strong>C software for management of part<br />

programmes <strong>and</strong> machining data, computation of the paths <strong>and</strong> feed rate <strong>and</strong><br />

monitoring of axis movements.<br />

The <strong>CN</strong>C/graphic processor card manages the display <strong>and</strong> the keyboard.<br />

The <strong>CN</strong>C/graphic processor card also performs system initialisation <strong>and</strong> system bus<br />

arbitration functions.


6.4.2 Graphic Processor Card<br />

L<br />

I<br />

A<br />

I<br />

S<br />

O<br />

N<br />

P<br />

U<br />

P<br />

I<br />

T<br />

R<br />

E<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

Proc Graph<br />

Power consumption 10.2 W (including the operator panel card)<br />

Location <strong>CN</strong>C card No. 0 (see 4.1.1)<br />

Cards<br />

The graphic processor card is a 32-bit processor card built around a 68020<br />

microprocessor.<br />

The graphic processor card manages the display unit <strong>and</strong> keyboard.<br />

The graphic processor card also provides system reset <strong>and</strong> system bus access<br />

conflict arbitration functions.<br />

The graphic processor card can communicate with:<br />

- the other <strong>CN</strong>C cards via the system bus,<br />

- the operator panel via the video link.<br />

en-938816/4 6 - 13<br />

6


6.4.3 Memory Card<br />

Mém<br />

1,5M/2M<br />

6 - 14 en-938816/4<br />

Power consumption 1.27 W<br />

Location in the continuity of the <strong>CN</strong>C cards (see 4.1.1)<br />

The memory card is a passive <strong>CN</strong>C card.<br />

On it are stored the operation <strong>and</strong> application software packages (REPROM),<br />

machine processor programmes <strong>and</strong> user files (RAM backup).<br />

The memory card communicates with the processor cards via the system bus.


6.4.4 Machine Processor Card<br />

6.4.4.1 Version 2 Machine Processor Card<br />

I<br />

T<br />

.<br />

E<br />

X<br />

T<br />

C<br />

A<br />

N<br />

/<br />

C<br />

N<br />

A<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

RS 232<br />

422/485<br />

RS 232<br />

Proc Mach<br />

Power consumption 6.85 W<br />

Location <strong>CN</strong>C card No. 1 (see 4.1.1)<br />

Analogue inputs 4 8-bit inputs, 0 / 10 V, nondifferential<br />

typical potentiometer rating 10 kΩ<br />

Analogue outputs 2 12-bit outputs + sign, - 10 / + 10 V<br />

minimum load 2 kΩ<br />

External reference output + 10 V, 100 mA<br />

External interrupts 4 x 5 V (2.5 to 5 V) or 24 V (15 to 30 V) inputs<br />

Cards<br />

The machine processor card is a 32-bit processor card built around a 68020<br />

microprocessor.<br />

The machine processor card manages the machine environment (inputs/outputs).<br />

The machine processor card can communicate with:<br />

- the other <strong>CN</strong>C cards via the system bus,<br />

- the input/output cards via the serial bus,<br />

- a peripheral via an RS 232 serial line,<br />

- a customer application peripheral or host computer (DNC) via a serial line<br />

configurable as RS 232E, RS 422A or RS 485,<br />

- analogue input/output modules via the CAN/<strong>CN</strong>A (ADC/DAC) connector.<br />

The machine processor card can also receive interrupts on the interrupt input<br />

connector.<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 15<br />

6


V2 Machine Processor Card Connection Diagram<br />

Feed rate<br />

potentiometer<br />

Spindle<br />

potentiometer<br />

Control of<br />

analogue<br />

processes:<br />

spindle,<br />

flow control<br />

6 - 16 en-938816/5<br />

Peripherals<br />

5<br />

1 2<br />

I<br />

T<br />

.<br />

E<br />

X<br />

T<br />

C<br />

A<br />

N<br />

/<br />

C<br />

N<br />

A<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

RS 232<br />

422/485<br />

RS 232<br />

Proc Mach<br />

3<br />

or<br />

4<br />

Switch<br />

interrupts<br />

1 - Analogue I/O cable (see 7.3.2)<br />

2 - Interrupt input cable (see 7.3.4)<br />

3 - Serial interface cable<br />

- RS 232E (see 7.1.1)<br />

- RS 422A (see 7.1.2)<br />

- RS 485 (see 7.1.3)<br />

4 - UNI-TELWAY bus link (see UNI-TELWAY Integration Manual)<br />

5 - RS 232 serial link cable (see 7.1.1)<br />

Computer<br />

REMARK The serial lines must be configured using the serial line parameter setting utility<br />

(see Operator Manual).<br />

UNI-TELWAY


6.4.4.2 Version 1 Machine Processor Card<br />

General<br />

I<br />

T<br />

.<br />

E<br />

X<br />

T<br />

C<br />

A<br />

N<br />

/<br />

C<br />

N<br />

A<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

TIMER<br />

TTL<br />

RS 232C<br />

Proc Mach<br />

Power consumption 6.85 W<br />

Location <strong>CN</strong>C card No. 1 (see 4.1.1)<br />

Analogue inputs 4 8-bit inputs, 0 / 10 V, nondifferential<br />

typical potentiometer rating 10 kΩ<br />

Analogue outputs 2 12-bit outputs + sign, - 10 / + 10 V<br />

minimum load 2 kΩ<br />

External reference output + 10 V, 100 mA<br />

One timer input <strong>and</strong> one timer output<br />

External interrupts 4 x 5 V (2.5 to 5 V) or 24 V (15 to 30 V) inputs<br />

Cards<br />

The machine processor card is a 32-bit processor card built around a 68020<br />

microprocessor.<br />

The machine processor card manages the machine environment (inputs/outputs).<br />

The machine processor card can communicate with:<br />

- the other <strong>CN</strong>C cards via the system bus,<br />

- the input/output cards via the serial bus,<br />

- a peripheral via an RS 232 serial line,<br />

- a customer application peripheral or host computer (DNC) via a TTL output<br />

configurable as RS 232, RS 485 or fibre-optic link,<br />

- analogue input/output modules <strong>and</strong> external clocks via the CAN/<strong>CN</strong>A/TIMER<br />

connector (ADC/DAC/TIMER).<br />

The machine processor card can also receive interrupts via the interrupt input<br />

connector.<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 17<br />

6


V1 Machine Processor Card Connection Diagram<br />

Feed rate<br />

potentiometer<br />

Spindle<br />

potentiometer<br />

Control of<br />

analogue<br />

processes:<br />

spindle,<br />

flow control<br />

Timer input<br />

Timer output<br />

Peripherals<br />

6 - 18 en-938816/5<br />

7<br />

1 2<br />

I<br />

T<br />

.<br />

E<br />

X<br />

T<br />

C<br />

A<br />

N<br />

/<br />

C<br />

N<br />

A<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

TIMER<br />

TTL<br />

RS 232C<br />

Proc Mach<br />

6<br />

5<br />

3<br />

or<br />

4<br />

Switch<br />

interrupts<br />

Computer<br />

Computer<br />

1 - Analogue timer cable (see 7.3.3)<br />

2 - Interrupt input cable (see 7.3.4)<br />

3 - Adapter RS232 (see 7.1.5) or adapter RS485 (see 7.1.6) serial<br />

link cable<br />

4 - UNI-TELWAY bus link (see UNI-TELWAY Integration Manual)<br />

5 Adapter:<br />

- TTL/RS 232 (P/N 205 201 338)<br />

- TTL/RS 485 (P/N 205 201 339)<br />

6 - TTL output/adapter connecting cable (see 7.1.4)<br />

7 - RS 232 serial link cable (see 7.1.1)<br />

REMARK The serial lines must be configured using the serial line parameter setting utility<br />

(see Operator Manual).<br />

UNI-TELWAY


6.4.5 <strong>CN</strong>C Processor<br />

6.4.5.1 Version 2 <strong>CN</strong>C Processor<br />

General<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

L<br />

H<br />

D<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

RS 232<br />

RS 232<br />

422/485<br />

Proc <strong>CN</strong><br />

Power consumption 5 W<br />

Location <strong>CN</strong>C card No. 2 (see 4.1.1)<br />

Cards<br />

The <strong>CN</strong>C processor card is a 32-bit processor card built around a 68030<br />

microprocessor.<br />

The <strong>CN</strong>C processor card uses the <strong>CN</strong>C software to manage part programmes <strong>and</strong><br />

machining data, compute paths <strong>and</strong> speeds <strong>and</strong> control axis movements.<br />

The <strong>CN</strong>C processor card can communicate with:<br />

- the axis cards <strong>and</strong> other <strong>CN</strong>C cards via the system bus,<br />

- a peripheral device via the RS 232 serial line,<br />

- a peripheral device or host computer (DNC) via a multist<strong>and</strong>ard serial interface<br />

configurable as RS 232E, RS 422A or RS 485.<br />

Optional High-Speed Line (LHD)<br />

An optional high-speed line daughterboard can be used with the version 2 <strong>CN</strong>C<br />

processor. This RS 422 line supports data rates up to 115 kbit/s.<br />

Power consumption 5 W<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 19<br />

6


V2 <strong>CN</strong>C Processor Card Connection Diagram<br />

6 - 20 en-938816/5<br />

Peripherals<br />

1<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

L<br />

H<br />

D<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

RS 232<br />

RS 232<br />

422/485<br />

Proc <strong>CN</strong><br />

1 - RS 232 serial link cable (see 7.1.1)<br />

2 - Serial link cable:<br />

- RS 232E (see 7.1.1)<br />

- RS 422A (see 7.1.2)<br />

- RS 485 (see 7.1.3)<br />

2<br />

Computer<br />

REMARK The serial lines must be configured using the serial line parameter setting utility<br />

(see Operator Manual).


High-Speed Line Card Connection Diagram<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

S<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

E<br />

L<br />

H<br />

D<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

RS 232<br />

RS 232<br />

422/485<br />

Proc <strong>CN</strong><br />

1 - High-speed line cable (see 7.1.2)<br />

1<br />

Computer<br />

Cards<br />

REMARK The serial lines must be configured using the serial line parameter setting utility<br />

(see Operator Manual).<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 21<br />

6


6.4.4.2 Version 1 <strong>CN</strong>C Processor Card<br />

General<br />

D<br />

N<br />

C<br />

P<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

P<br />

H<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

Proc <strong>CN</strong><br />

6 - 22 en-938816/5<br />

Power consumption 5.55 W<br />

Location <strong>CN</strong>C card No. 2 (see 4.1.1)<br />

The <strong>CN</strong>C processor card is a 32-bit processor card built around a 68020<br />

microprocessor.<br />

The <strong>CN</strong>C processor card uses the <strong>CN</strong>C software to manage part programmes <strong>and</strong><br />

machining data, compute paths <strong>and</strong> speeds <strong>and</strong> control axis movements.<br />

The <strong>CN</strong>C processor card can communicate with:<br />

- the axis cards <strong>and</strong> other <strong>CN</strong>C cards via the system bus,<br />

- a peripheral device via the RS 232 serial line,<br />

- a host computer (DNC) by a TTL output configurable as RS 232 or RS 485 or a<br />

fibre-optic link.


V1 <strong>CN</strong>C Processor Card Connection Diagram<br />

Peripherals<br />

4<br />

D<br />

N<br />

C<br />

P<br />

E<br />

R<br />

I<br />

P<br />

H<br />

Halt<br />

Def<br />

Proc <strong>CN</strong><br />

Computer<br />

1 - TTL output/adapter connecting cable (see 7.1.4)<br />

2 - Adapter:<br />

- TTL/RS 232 (P/N 205 201 338)<br />

- TTL/RS 485 (P/N 205 201 339)<br />

3 - Adapter RS 232 (see 7.1.5) or adapter RS 485 (see 7.1.6) serial<br />

link cable<br />

4 - RS 232 serial link cable (see 7.1.1)<br />

1<br />

3<br />

Cards<br />

REMARK The serial lines must be configured using the serial line parameter setting utility<br />

(see Operator Manual).<br />

2<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 23<br />

6


6.5 Incremental <strong>and</strong> Absolute Axis Measurement Card<br />

6.5.1 General<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

Axes<br />

6 - 24 en-938816/5<br />

Power consumption 6.85 W (4-axis card)<br />

Location in the continuity of the <strong>CN</strong>C cards (see 4.1.1)<br />

Servo-drive analogue output 1 14- or 15-bit output, - 10 / + 10 V per axis<br />

Switch contact 1 x 24 V input per axis (19.2 to 30 V including<br />

a 5% ripple)<br />

Switch input impedance 2.15 kilohms ∗ (2 to 2.4 kilohms)<br />

Switch input current 11 mA minimum ∗ (7.5 mA on old card models)<br />

∗ Cards P/N 204 203 000, dash number ≥ E, P/N 204 203 001, dash number ≥ E<br />

<strong>and</strong> P/N 204 203 002, dash number ≥ D.<br />

The axis encoder cards provide the interface between the <strong>CN</strong>C processor card <strong>and</strong><br />

the axes: control of the servo-drives <strong>and</strong> processing of the sensor data.<br />

The axis encoder cards can communicate with:<br />

- the processor providing the <strong>CN</strong>C function via the system bus,<br />

- the servo-drives <strong>and</strong> axis sensors via the axis connectors.<br />

There are three types of axis measurements:<br />

- incremental measurement,<br />

- absolute measurement by SSI (Serial Synchronous Interface),<br />

- measurement by rules with distance-coded reference marks.


6.5.2 Data Concerning the Sensors <strong>and</strong> Their Power Supply<br />

Cards<br />

Position Sensors Approved by NUM<br />

Incremental sensors: ROD 428B (HEIDENHAIN), DG 60L (STEGMANN), ENH 2E7C55 (CODECHAMP) <strong>and</strong><br />

C3158-05 (MCB).<br />

Incremental rules with distance-coded reference marks: LS 706C + EXE 612 (HEIDENHAIN).<br />

Single- or multi-turn SSI (Serial Synchronous Interface) absolute sensors: ROC 424 (HEIDENHAIN), AG 66 <strong>and</strong><br />

AG 661 (STEGMANN), GM400 <strong>and</strong> GM401 (IVO).<br />

Combined sensors (SSI + incremental): E<strong>CN</strong> 1313 + IBV 610, EQN 1325 + IBV 650, ROC 412 + IBV 610 <strong>and</strong> R<strong>CN</strong> 619<br />

(HEIDENHAIN).<br />

Requirements for the Sensors <strong>and</strong> Their Power Supply<br />

The location of a sensor is subject to several constraints:<br />

- minimum sensor power supply voltage (see 6.5.2.1),<br />

- maximum frequency above which the signals output by the sensor are no longer accurately counted by the system<br />

(incremental channels, see 6.5.2.2),<br />

- maximum current available per card for power supply of the sensors (see 6.5.2.5).<br />

These constraints determine:<br />

- the minimum size of the power cables to be used,<br />

- the maximum cable lengths,<br />

- the possible requirement for an external power supply.<br />

In the case of incremental or semiabsolute sensors, it is necessary to set the origin switch after installation (see 6.5.2.6<br />

or 6.5.2.7).<br />

Consumption of the Axis Interface Module<br />

The axis interface module consumption to be taken into account is:<br />

- 14 mA maximum on the sensor power supply ("PRESENCE TENSION" (POWER ON) LED),<br />

- 7 mA maximum on the switch power supply ("/BUTEE" (/SWITCH) LED).<br />

6.5.2.1 Voltage Across the Sensor<br />

When installing a position sensor, make sure it is provided with the minimum power supply voltage for that type of<br />

sensor.<br />

5 VDC Sensors<br />

When the NUM power supply is used, the voltage across the sensor is given by the equation:<br />

Uc = 4.95 - (0.45 + 36.8 x 10-3 x L/S) x I<br />

where:<br />

- Uc (V) is the voltage across the sensor,<br />

- L (m) is the cable length (one way),<br />

- S (mm2 ) is the cross-sectional area of the power conductor,<br />

- I (A) is the current flow through the sensor.<br />

The minimum wire size of the power supply conductors is calculated from the maximum current through the sensor,<br />

the minimum voltage across the sensor <strong>and</strong> the required wire length.<br />

It is recommended not to use wires with a cross-sectional area above 2.624 mm 2 . If a larger size is required, the use<br />

of an external power supply located near the sensor can reduce the required wire size.<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 25<br />

6


Example of a 5 V + 5 percent sensor, current rating 220 mA<br />

The computed voltage (Uc) must not be less than 4.75 V.<br />

The table below gives the calculation results obtained for different cable lengths using the NUM power supply.<br />

Cable length Minimum cross-sectional<br />

area<br />

Voltage across the sensor<br />

20 m 1.65 mm2 4.753 V<br />

30 m 2.624 mm2 4.758 V<br />

Above 30 m, the required wire size would exceed 2.624 mm2. In this case, use an external power supply whose<br />

characteristics provide a minimum voltage of 4.75 V across the sensor while preserving a reasonable cable size.<br />

Sensors Requiring a Power Supply Voltage Above 5 VDC<br />

The use of an external power supply is m<strong>and</strong>atory.<br />

6.5.2.2 Maximum Sensor Channel Output Frequency<br />

The diagram below shows the signal waveform on sensor channels A <strong>and</strong> B:<br />

6 - 26 en-938816/5<br />

Channel A<br />

Channel B<br />

Pulses<br />

a<br />

Te : signal period of one of the channels.<br />

a : time between two edges<br />

The sensor channel output frequency is equal to: fe = 1 / Te Extreme values allowing correct detection of the signals by the system:<br />

- maximum frequency : fe max = 1.8 MHz,<br />

- minimum time between two edges: a min = 138 ns.<br />

The minimum time between two edges allowing correct signal detection by the system depends on the length <strong>and</strong> type<br />

of cable used. The table below summarises the results of tests conducted with shielded cables [4 x (2 x 0.14 mm2 )]<br />

connecting the sensor to the axis encoder card <strong>and</strong> using an external power supply:<br />

Cable length Minimum time between two edges<br />

10 m 147 ns<br />

20 m 156 ns<br />

50 m 250 ns<br />

Te


Cards<br />

6.5.2.3 Setting the Reference Signal (Rulers with Distance-Coded Reference Marks)<br />

The reference signal (Z pulse) must be set for an electrical angle of 90 degrees. This setting can be made on the EXE<br />

or IBV units.<br />

6.5.2.4 Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) Timing Diagram<br />

Sensor clock<br />

Data channel<br />

fclock = 1/T: minimum 100 kHz, maximum 2 MHz<br />

Tv : minimum 50 ns, maximum T<br />

synchronisation <strong>and</strong> data bits: maximum 32 bits<br />

status bits: maximum 4 bits<br />

parity bit: maximum 1 bit.<br />

T<br />

T v<br />

Availability of new<br />

sensor data<br />

REMARK The synchronisation bits consist of a sequence of 0’s at the beginning of the frame<br />

(not present on most encoders).<br />

Depending on the clock frequency <strong>and</strong> sensor cable length L, the clock output is connected to the clock input on the<br />

card connector or on the sensor:<br />

Sensor clock frequency Connection to card Connection to sensor<br />

100 kHz L < 400 m L < 400 m<br />

200 kHz L < 200 m L < 250 m<br />

400 kHz L < 60 m L < 150 m<br />

500 kHz L < 50 m L < 100 m<br />

800 kHz L < 30 m L < 85 m<br />

1 MHz L < 20 m L < 75 m<br />

1.6 MHz L < 5 m L < 60 m<br />

2 MHz ---- L < 50 m<br />

6.5.2.5 Maximum Current Available per Axis Encoder Card<br />

An axis encoder card can provide a maximum output of 1 A for all the sensors connected.<br />

The current draw of a sensor cannot exceed 350 mA.<br />

Above this value, an external power supply is required.<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 27<br />

6


6.5.2.6 Datum Switch Setting (Incremental Sensors)<br />

The datum is set on the zero pulse following opening of the datum switch contact:<br />

6 - 28 en-938816/5<br />

Datum setting<br />

Contact closed Contact open<br />

1 / 4 1 / 4<br />

Useful area<br />

1 encoder revolution<br />

Om<br />

Sensor zero pulse<br />

The switch must be set so that the contact opens between one-quarter <strong>and</strong> three-quarters of the distance separating<br />

two zero pulses in order to prevent the switch from coinciding with the zero pulse, which (through hysterisis) would<br />

cause a r<strong>and</strong>om shift of a distance equal to the distance separating two zero pulses.<br />

The datum switch must be set so that the contact is open before detection of the zero pulse <strong>and</strong> remains open until<br />

the axis stops after detection of the zero pulse.


Cards<br />

6.5.2.7 Setting the Origin Switch (SSI or Combined Sensor with Semiabsolute Measurement)<br />

The axis travel exceeds the sensor measurement travel. Homing is carried out on opening of the origin switch. It is<br />

used to identify the sensor revolution on which the switch operates:<br />

Homing direction<br />

Contact closed Contact open<br />

Sensor zero<br />

pulse<br />

1 / 4 1 / 4<br />

Useful area<br />

1 sensor revolution<br />

Sensor zero pulse<br />

The electrical contact opening signal must be clean, without bounce.<br />

The switch must be set so that the contact opens between one-quarter <strong>and</strong> three-quarters of the distance separating<br />

two zero pulses. This is to avoid coincidence between the switch <strong>and</strong> zero pulse, which could cause a r<strong>and</strong>om shift<br />

by a distance equal to that separating two zero pulses.<br />

The switch size should be such that the contact opens before detection of the sensor zero pulse <strong>and</strong> remains open<br />

until the axis stops after detection of the open contact on the switch input.<br />

6.5.2.8 Homing of SSI or Combined Sensors with Absolute Measurement<br />

The axis travel is less than the sensor measurement travel. Homing is made at any point of the axis travel at power<br />

on or after a reset of the <strong>CN</strong>C.<br />

The axis connector switch input should not be wired.<br />

REMARK The sensor zero pulse must occur outside the axis travel.<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 29<br />

6


6.5.3 Axis Card Connection Diagram<br />

2<br />

Sensor<br />

3<br />

Servo-drive<br />

6 - 30 en-938816/5<br />

External<br />

power supply<br />

Origin<br />

switch<br />

Connection of an axis to an axis interface<br />

1 - Axis cable (see table)<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

Axes<br />

1<br />

External<br />

power supply<br />

Connection of an axis with interface module<br />

2 - Axis cables (see table)<br />

3 - Axis interface module (P/N 263 900 000) <strong>and</strong> cable 1.5 m long<br />

(P/N 260 900 000)<br />

Axis type Power supply Cable alone Cable with interface<br />

(see) module (see)<br />

Encoded supplied by the card 7.2.1.1 7.2.1.2 et 7.2.7<br />

external 7.2.1.1 <strong>and</strong> 7.2.6 same as above<br />

Absolute SSI measurement supplied by the card 7.2.2.1 7.2.2.2 <strong>and</strong> 7.2.7<br />

external 7.2.2.1 <strong>and</strong> 7.2.6 same as above<br />

Semiabsolute SSI supplied by the card 7.2.3.1 7.2.3.2 <strong>and</strong> 7.2.7<br />

measurement external 7.2.3.1 <strong>and</strong> 7.2.6 same as above<br />

Combined: SSI + incremental supplied by the card 7.2.4.1 7.2.4.2 <strong>and</strong> 7.2.7<br />

(sinusoidal pulses) external 7.2.4.1 <strong>and</strong> 7.2.6 same as above<br />

Combined: SSI + incremental supplied by the card 7.2.5.1 7.2.5.2 <strong>and</strong> 7.2.7<br />

(square pulses) external 7.2.5.1 <strong>and</strong> 7.2.6 same as above<br />

Servo-drive<br />

Sensor<br />

Origin<br />

switch


6.5.4 H<strong>and</strong>wheel Connection Diagram<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

Axes<br />

1<br />

H<strong>and</strong>wheel<br />

1 - H<strong>and</strong>wheel cable<br />

- with non-differential outputs (see 7.2.8)<br />

- with differential outputs (see 7.2.9)<br />

Cards<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 31<br />

6


6.6 IT/Serial Line Card<br />

6.6.1 General<br />

I<br />

T<br />

L<br />

I<br />

G<br />

N<br />

E<br />

1<br />

L<br />

I<br />

G<br />

N<br />

E<br />

2<br />

L<br />

I<br />

G<br />

N<br />

E<br />

3<br />

L<br />

I<br />

G<br />

N<br />

E<br />

4<br />

IT/L.SERIES<br />

6 - 32 en-938816/5<br />

Power consumption 2 W maximum<br />

Location in the continuity of the <strong>CN</strong>C cards (see 4.1.1)<br />

External interrupts 4 5 V inputs (2.5 to 5 V) or 24 V inputs (15 to<br />

30 V)<br />

The IT/serial line card is a slave card that can be controlled by the CPU cards.<br />

The IT/serial line card is dedicated to:<br />

- reception of external interrupt inputs<br />

or<br />

- data transfers over the serial lines (RS 232, RS 422 or RS 485: programmed by<br />

software).<br />

The IT/serial line card communicates with the CPU via the system bus.


6.6.2 IT/Serial Line Connection Diagram<br />

Peripheral<br />

2<br />

I<br />

T<br />

IT/L.SERIES<br />

1 - Interrupt input cable (see 7.3.5)<br />

2 - Serial link cable:<br />

- RS 232 (see 7.1.1)<br />

- RS 422 (see 7.1.2)<br />

- RS 485 (see 7.1.3)<br />

L<br />

I<br />

G<br />

N<br />

E<br />

1<br />

L<br />

I<br />

G<br />

N<br />

E<br />

2<br />

L<br />

I<br />

G<br />

N<br />

E<br />

3<br />

L<br />

I<br />

G<br />

N<br />

E<br />

4<br />

1<br />

Switch<br />

interrupts<br />

Cards<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 33<br />

6


6.7 Analogue Input/Output Card<br />

6.7.1 General<br />

8S<br />

Réf.±10V<br />

8E<br />

8E/8S<br />

ANALOG.<br />

6 - 34 en-938816/5<br />

Power consumption 6.7 W maximum<br />

Location in the continuity of the NC cards (see 4.1.1)<br />

Protection Very fast-blow (FF) 10 A, 5x20 fuses.<br />

Spare fuses are provided on the card.<br />

Inputs<br />

8 (or 1) differential high-impedance inputs<br />

Typical potentiometer rating 10 kΩ<br />

Voltage measurement range ± 10 V<br />

Gain of 1 or 10 for each programmable input<br />

Conversion to 12 bits + sign, resolution (LSB): 2.44 mV<br />

Read of the 8 inputs every 1.36 ms or of the first input every 0.17 ms (not<br />

synchronised with the sampling period)<br />

Outputs<br />

8 analogue outputs<br />

Output voltage range ± 10 V<br />

No gain control<br />

Conversion to 12 bits + sign, resolution (LSB): 2.44 mV<br />

Fan-out: 5 mA<br />

Output conversion completed in 20 μs (not synchronised with the sampling<br />

period)<br />

Reference Voltages<br />

Two reference voltages (+10 V <strong>and</strong> -10 V) available on the output connector can<br />

supply a current of 100 mA<br />

The analogue input/output card is a slave card controlled by the CPU cards.<br />

The analogue input/output card performs the following functions:<br />

- analogue-to-digital conversion (input),<br />

- digital-to-analogue conversion (output),<br />

- reference voltage generation.<br />

The analogue input/output card communicates with the CPU cards via the system<br />

bus.<br />

The analogue input/output card can be configured by a machine processor instruction<br />

(see Automatic Control Function Programming Manual):<br />

- 8 inputs or 1 input,<br />

- gain of 1 or 10 for each input.<br />

The default configuration is 8 inputs with a gain of 1 per input.


6.7.2 Analogue Input/Output Connection Diagram<br />

8 references<br />

on analogue<br />

inputs<br />

2<br />

8S<br />

Réf.±10V<br />

8E<br />

8E/8S<br />

ANALOG.<br />

1 - Analogue output/reference voltage cable (see 7.3.7)<br />

2 - Analogue input cable (see 7.3.6)<br />

! CAUTION<br />

Use only very fast-blow fuses (FF) to replace the fuses on the board.<br />

1<br />

Cards<br />

8 loads on<br />

analogue<br />

outputs<br />

2 loads on<br />

reference<br />

voltages<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 35<br />

6


6.8 32-24 I/O <strong>and</strong> 64-48 I/O Cards<br />

The input/output cards are used for logic signal transfers between the machine <strong>and</strong> its environment <strong>and</strong> the machine<br />

processor card.<br />

The input/output cards can:<br />

- communicate with the machine processor card via the serial bus,<br />

- receive input signals via front panel connector 64 I (or 32 I),<br />

- send output signals via front panel connector 48 O (or 24 O).<br />

6.8.1 Characteristics of the 32-24 I/O <strong>and</strong> 64-48 I/O Cards<br />

24.O<br />

32.I<br />

32.I / 24.O<br />

6 - 36 en-938816/5<br />

Outputs<br />

O 00.0 to O 00.7<br />

O 01.0 to O 01.7<br />

O 02.0 to O 02.7<br />

Inputs<br />

I 00.0 to I 00.7<br />

I 01.0 to I 01.7<br />

I 02.0 to I 02.7<br />

I 03.0 to I 03.7<br />

48.O<br />

64.I<br />

64.I / 48.O<br />

32-24 I/O card 64-48 I/O card<br />

Outputs<br />

O 03.0 to O 03.7<br />

O 04.0 to O 04.7<br />

O 05.0 to O 05.7<br />

O 00.0 to O 00.7<br />

O 01.0 to O 01.7<br />

O 02.0 to O 02.7<br />

Inputs<br />

I 04.0 to I 04.7<br />

I 05.0 to I 05.7<br />

I 06.0 to I 06.7<br />

I 07.0 to I 07.7<br />

I 00.0 to I 00.7<br />

I 01.0 to I 01.7<br />

I 02.0 to I 02.7<br />

I 03.0 to I 03.7<br />

The characteristics below are those of the cards alone (for the characteristics of the inputs <strong>and</strong> outputs with interface<br />

<strong>and</strong> relay modules, see 6.10 <strong>and</strong> 6.11 respectively).<br />

Power consumption Maximum 4 W<br />

Location in the continuation of the input/output cards (see 4.1.1 <strong>and</strong> 4.1.2)<br />

Protection Very fast-blow (FF) 10 A, 5x20 fuses. Spare fuses are provided on the card.


Inputs<br />

Inputs discrete, as per IEC 1131, type 1<br />

32-24 I/O card 32 inputs I 00.0 to I 03.7<br />

64-48 I/O card 64 inputs I 00.0 to I 07.7<br />

Input interface<br />

Nominal voltage 24 VDC (external power supply)<br />

Voltage limits 15-30 VDC<br />

Consumption maximum 30 mA<br />

Input ratings<br />

Nominal voltage 24 VDC<br />

Current rating 8 mA per input<br />

Operating ranges low level: 0-9 V (current ≤ 2 mA)<br />

high level: 12-30 V (current > 4 mA)<br />

Input impedance 4.7 kΩ<br />

Reverse voltage withst<strong>and</strong> 30 VDC continuous<br />

Response time 4.7 ms<br />

Scanning time 2.6 ms<br />

Sensor common positive power supply terminal<br />

Logic positive (current sink)<br />

Outputs<br />

Open-collector discrete outputs<br />

32-24 I/O card 24 outputs O 00.0 to O 02.7<br />

64-48 I/O card 48 outputs O 00.0 to O 05.7<br />

Output interface<br />

Nominal voltage 24 VDC (external power supply)<br />

Voltage limits 15-30 VDC<br />

Consumption maximum 30 mA<br />

Output ratings<br />

Nominal voltage 24 VDC (external power supply)<br />

Current rating 250 mA per output<br />

Limits<br />

Voltage 15-30 VDC<br />

Current 3 A for t < 10 ms (per output)<br />

Response time 300 μs<br />

High level overshoot voltage maximum 0.5 V<br />

Low level leakage current maximum 0.3 mA<br />

Protection<br />

Overload <strong>and</strong> short-circuit thermal with trip per group of 16 outputs<br />

Inductive overvoltage limiter <strong>and</strong> discharge diode<br />

Pole reversal reverse-mounted parallel diode<br />

Isolation voltage at 50 Hz 2500 Vrms between groups of channels <strong>and</strong> internal bus<br />

Load C load: C < 2 mF<br />

L load: t < 2.4 ms<br />

R load: 50 Ω < R < 10 kΩ<br />

Sensor common negative power supply terminal<br />

Logic positive (current source)<br />

! CAUTION<br />

Use only very fast-blow fuses (FF) to replace the fuses on the board.<br />

Cards<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 37<br />

6


6.8.2 32-24 I/O Card Connection<br />

6.8.2.1 32-24 I/O Card Connection Diagram with Remote Modules<br />

6 - 38 en-938816/5<br />

1<br />

MOD. RELAYAGE 24 S<br />

MOD. INTERFACE 32 E<br />

5 4<br />

2<br />

24.O<br />

32.I<br />

32.I / 24.O<br />

1 - 24-output relay module (P/N 263 900 002 or 263 202 931)<br />

See 6.11.2 or 6.11.3 for connection of the relay modules<br />

2 - Card/relay module connecting cable:<br />

- Length 1 m (P/N 263 203 079)<br />

- Length 2 m (P/N 263 203 080)<br />

- Length 5 m (P/N 263 203 612)<br />

See Sec 7.4.3 for customising the cables<br />

3 - Leave the protection in place on the unused part of the connectors<br />

4 - Card/interface module connecting cable:<br />

- Length 1 m (P/N 263 203 077)<br />

- Length 2 m (P/N 263 203 078)<br />

- Length 5 m (P/N 263 203 611)<br />

See 7.4.3 for customising the cables<br />

5 - 32-input interface module (P/N 263 900 001 or 263 202 926)<br />

See 6.10.2 or 6.10.3 for connection of the interface modules<br />

3


6.8.2.2 32-24 I/O Card Connection Diagram<br />

Inputs<br />

1<br />

External<br />

24 VDC<br />

power supply<br />

2<br />

24.O<br />

32.I<br />

32.I / 24.O<br />

1 - I/O card 32-input cable (see 7.4.1 <strong>and</strong> 7.4.3)<br />

2 - Leave the protection in place on the unused part of the connectors<br />

3 - I/O card 24-output cables (see 7.4.2 <strong>and</strong> 7.4.3)<br />

3<br />

Outputs<br />

Cards<br />

External<br />

24 VDC<br />

power supply<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 39<br />

6


6.8.3 64-48 I/O Card Connection<br />

6.8.3.1 64-48 I/O Card Connection Diagram with Remote Modules<br />

1<br />

6 - 40 en-938816/5<br />

MOD. INTERFACE 32 E<br />

2<br />

MOD. INTERFACE 32 E<br />

6<br />

3<br />

MOD. RELAYAGE 24 S<br />

1 - Power supply common to the two interface modules<br />

2 - Power supply common to the two relay modules<br />

3 - 24-output relay modules (P/N 263 900 002 or 263 202 931)<br />

See 6.11.2 or 6.11.3 for connection of the relay modules<br />

4 - Card/relay module connecting cable:<br />

- Length 1 m (P/N 263 203 079)<br />

- Length 2 m (P/N 263 203 080)<br />

- Length 5 m (P/N 263 203 612)<br />

See Sec 7.4.3 for customising the cables<br />

5 - Card/interface module connecting cable:<br />

- Length 1 m (P/N 263 203 077)<br />

- Length 2 m (P/N 263 203 078)<br />

- Length 5 m (P/N 263 203 611)<br />

See Sec 7.4.3 for customising the cables<br />

6 - 32-input interface modules (P/N 263 900 001 or 263 202 926)<br />

See 6.10.2 or 6.10.3 for connection of the interface modules<br />

MOD. RELAYAGE 24 S<br />

5<br />

4<br />

48.O<br />

64.I<br />

64.I / 48.O


6.8.3.2 64-48 I/O Card Connection Diagram<br />

Inputs<br />

External<br />

24 VDC<br />

power supply<br />

Inputs<br />

1<br />

24.O<br />

32.I<br />

32.I / 24.O<br />

1 - Two I/O card 32-input cables (see 7.4.1 <strong>and</strong> 7.4.3)<br />

2 - Two I/O card 24-output cables (see 7.4.2 <strong>and</strong> 7.4.3)<br />

2<br />

Outputs<br />

Cards<br />

External<br />

24 VDC<br />

power supply<br />

Outputs<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 41<br />

6


6.9 32-Input/24-Output Card<br />

6.9.1 General<br />

24 S<br />

24 VEE<br />

0VE<br />

32 E<br />

32 E / 24 S<br />

6 - 42 en-938816/5<br />

Outputs Inputs<br />

32 discrete inputs<br />

Input interface<br />

O 00.0 to O 00.7 Nominal voltage<br />

Limit values<br />

O 01.0 to O 01.7 Consumption<br />

O 02.0 to O 02.7 Input values<br />

Nominal voltage<br />

Maximum current rating<br />

Encoder power supply<br />

24 VDC (external power supply)<br />

15-30 VDC<br />

30 mA maximum<br />

24 VDC<br />

12.8 mA per input<br />

19.4-30 VDC<br />

Operating ranges low level: 0-5 V (current ≤ 2,4 mA)<br />

high level: 11-30 V (current > 5,3 mA)<br />

Input impedance low level: 2060 Ω<br />

high level: 1800 - 2060 Ω<br />

Reverse voltage capability 30 VDC continuous<br />

Response time 4.7 ms<br />

Scanning time 2.6 ms<br />

Sensor common positive power conductor<br />

Logic positive (current draw)<br />

Inputs<br />

I 00.0 to I 00.7<br />

I 01.0 to I 01.7<br />

I 02.0 to I 02.7<br />

I 03.0 to I 03.7<br />

Power consumption 4 W maximum<br />

Location in the continuity of the input/output cards<br />

(see 4.1.1 <strong>and</strong> 4.1.2)<br />

Protection Very fast-blow (FF) 10 A, 5x20 fuses.<br />

Spare fuses are provided on the card.<br />

Outputs<br />

24 open-collector group 1: 16 outputs O 00.0 to O 01.7<br />

discrete outputs group 2: 8 outputs O 02.0 to O 02.7<br />

Output interface<br />

Nominal voltage 24 VDC (external power supply)<br />

Limit values 15-30 VDC<br />

Consumption 30 mA maximum per group of outputs<br />

Nominal values<br />

Nominal voltage 24 VDC (external power supply)<br />

Rated current 250 mA per output<br />

Limit values<br />

Voltage 15-30 VDC<br />

Current 3 A for t < 10 μs (per output)<br />

Response time 300 μs<br />

Residual high level voltage 0.5 V max<br />

Low level leakage current 0.3 mA max<br />

Protection<br />

Overload <strong>and</strong> short-circuit thermal with trip<br />

Inductive overvoltages clipping <strong>and</strong> discharge diode<br />

Polarity reversal reverse-biased parallel diode<br />

Dielectric strength at 50 Hz 2500 Vrms between channel groups <strong>and</strong><br />

internal bus<br />

Load C load: C < 2 μF<br />

L load: t < 2.4 ms<br />

R load: 50 Ω < R < 10 kΩ<br />

Common negative power supply wire<br />

Logic positive (current source)


Cards<br />

REMARK When the watchdog (see 4.4.2) is assigned to the 32 I/24 O card, it corresponds to<br />

output OUT.0 of this card.<br />

The 32-input/24-output cards h<strong>and</strong>le logic signal transfers between the machine <strong>and</strong> its environment <strong>and</strong> the machine<br />

processor card.<br />

The 32-input/24-output cards can:<br />

- communicate with the machine processor via the serial bus,<br />

- receive input signals via the 32-input connector on the front panel,<br />

- send output signals via the 24-output connector on the front panel.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

Use only very fast-blow fuses (FF) to replace the fuses on the board.<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 43<br />

6


6.9.2 32-Input/24-Output Card Connection Diagram with Remote Modules<br />

6 - 44 en-938816/5<br />

1<br />

MOD. RELAYAGE 24 S<br />

MOD. INTERFACE 32 E<br />

3<br />

2<br />

24 S<br />

24 VEE<br />

0VE<br />

32 E<br />

32 E / 24 S<br />

1 - 24-output relay modules (P/N 263 900 002 or 263 202 931)<br />

See 6.11.2 or 6.11.3 for connection of the relay modules<br />

2 - Card/remote module connecting cable:<br />

- Length 1 m (P/N 263 202 928)<br />

- Length 2 m (P/N 263 202 929)<br />

3 - 32-input interface module (P/N 263 900 001 or 263 202 926)<br />

See 6.10.2 or 6.10.3 for connection of the interface modules


6.9.3 32-Input/24-Output Card Connection Diagram<br />

24 VDC<br />

external<br />

power supply<br />

24 VDC<br />

external<br />

power supply<br />

Inputs<br />

2<br />

3<br />

24 S<br />

24 VEE<br />

0VE<br />

32 E<br />

32 E / 24 S<br />

Group 1<br />

outputs<br />

24 VDC<br />

external<br />

power supply<br />

for group 1<br />

24 VDC<br />

external<br />

power supply<br />

for group 2<br />

1 - 24-output cable for 32 I / 24 O card (see 7.4.5)<br />

2 - 32-input cable with or without general power supply of the inputs<br />

(see 7.4.4)<br />

3 - Power cable (only when cable 2 does not provide the general<br />

input power supply: see 7.5.2)<br />

1<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

Group 2<br />

outputs<br />

Cards<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 45<br />

6


6.10 32-Input Interface Modules<br />

The 32-input interface module is available in two models:<br />

- old model (P/N 263 202 926),<br />

- new model (P/N 263 900 001).<br />

6.10.1 Characteristics of the Interface Modules<br />

6 - 46 en-938816/5<br />

Interface Module P/N 263 900 001<br />

MOD. INTERFACE 32 E<br />

Interface module P/N 263 202 926 P/N 263 900 001<br />

Location remote remote<br />

32 discrete inputs complying with IEC 1131 type 2<br />

Power consumption maximum 24 W maximum 30 W<br />

(all inputs switched) (all inputs switched)<br />

Input ratings<br />

Nominal voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC<br />

Maximum current rating 19.2 mA per input 30 mA per input<br />

Operating ranges low level: 0 to 5 V low level: 0 to 5 V<br />

high level: 11 to 30 V high level: 11 to 30 V<br />

Timeout 5 ms ± 10 % 5 ms ± 10 %<br />

Wire size 0.2 to 2.5 mm 2 multistr<strong>and</strong> or 0.2 to 4 mm 2 single str<strong>and</strong><br />

Display 32 LEDs (LED lit for high level) 32 LEDs (LED lit for high level)<br />

The 32-input interface modules h<strong>and</strong>le logical signal transfers between the machine <strong>and</strong> its environment, <strong>and</strong> the<br />

machine processor via the following cards:<br />

- 32 inputs/24 outputs (see 6.9.2),<br />

- 32/24 I/O (see 6.8.2.1),<br />

- 64/48 I/O (see 6.8.3.1).


6.10.2 Wiring <strong>and</strong> Customising of Interface Module P/N 263 900 001<br />

AL- AL+<br />

24 VDC<br />

Power supply wiring<br />

Ladder marking area<br />

MOD. INTERFACE 32 E<br />

0 1 2 ... ... 30 31<br />

- + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +<br />

- +<br />

Input<br />

Power supply<br />

Common<br />

3-wire PNP<br />

type sensor<br />

Wiring of inputs E0 to E31<br />

AL- AL+<br />

Cards<br />

6.10.2.1 Wiring of the Inputs <strong>and</strong> Power Supply<br />

Three-wire sensors are wired to one of the 32 inputs (E00 to E31) <strong>and</strong> to the power supply wire (+) <strong>and</strong> common wire<br />

(-) closest to this input. Two-wire sensors are wired to one of the 32 inputs <strong>and</strong> to the power supply wire (+) closest<br />

to this input. All the power supply wires (+) are interconnected. All the commons (-) are interconnected.<br />

The interface module is supplied with 24 VDC on terminals AL- <strong>and</strong> AL+ of one of the two power supply terminal blocks.<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 47<br />

6


6.10.2.2 Customising the Interface Module - Correspondence with Ladder Notation<br />

An interface module can be connected to the input connector (32-input/24-output card), to the low part of the input<br />

connector (32-24 I/O card or first 32 inputs of the 64-48 I/O card) or to the high part of the connector (next 32 inputs,<br />

only with a 64-48 I/O card). The table below gives the correspondence between the marking of the interface module<br />

terminals <strong>and</strong> Ladder notation:<br />

Input Exx E00 to E07 E08 to E15 E16 to E23 E24 to E31<br />

First 32 inputs I 00.0 to I 00.7 I 01.0 to I 01.7 I 02.0 to I 02.7 I 03.0 to I 03.7<br />

Next 32 inputs I 04.0 to I 04.7 I 05.0 to I 05.7 I 06.0 to I 06.7 I 07.0 to I 07.7<br />

(64-48 I/O card)<br />

The interface module includes a marking area for Ladder notation. Detail of the marking area:<br />

6 - 48 en-938816/5<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7<br />

White space for writing with felt pen<br />

The numbers to be written in the marking area are:<br />

- 0, 1, 2 <strong>and</strong> 3 when the interface module is connected to the low part of the input connector or to the 32-input/<br />

24-output card connector,<br />

- 4, 5, 6 <strong>and</strong> 7 when the interface module is connected to the high part of the input connector.


6.10.3 Wiring of Interface Module P/N 263 202 926<br />

COM +AL<br />

E00<br />

24 VDC<br />

Power supply wiring<br />

Input wiring<br />

Input = Exx<br />

Power supply = Lxx<br />

Common = Cxx<br />

xx = input number (00 to 1F)<br />

MOD. INTERFACE 32 E<br />

E1F<br />

3-wire PNP<br />

type sensor<br />

Cards<br />

6.10.3.1 Wiring of the Inputs <strong>and</strong> Power Supply<br />

Three-wire sensors are connected to one of inputs E00 to E1F, <strong>and</strong> to the power supply <strong>and</strong> corresponding common<br />

wire (L00 to L1F <strong>and</strong> C00 to C1F) as shown in the diagram above. Two-wire sensors are wired only to one of the inputs<br />

<strong>and</strong> the corresponding power supply wire.<br />

The interface module is supplied with 24 VDC on terminals COM <strong>and</strong> +AL.<br />

6.10.3.2 Correspondence with Ladder Notation<br />

An interface module can be connected to the input connector (32-input/24-output card), to the low part of the input<br />

connector (32-24 I/O card or first 32 inputs of the 64-48 I/O card) or to the high part of the connector (next 32 inputs,<br />

only with a 64-48 I/O card). The table below gives the correspondence between the marking of the interface module<br />

terminals <strong>and</strong> Ladder notation:<br />

Input Exx E00 to E07 E08 to E0F E10 to E17 E18 to E1F<br />

First 32 inputs I 00.0 to I 00.7 I 01.0 to I 01.7 I 02.0 to I 02.7 I 03.0 to I 03.7<br />

Next 32 inputs I 04.0 to I 04.7 I 05.0 to I 05.7 I 06.0 to I 06.7 I 07.0 to I 07.7<br />

(64-48 I/O card)<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 49<br />

6


6.11 24-Output Relay Modules<br />

The 24-output relay modules are available in two models:<br />

- old model (P/N 263 202 931),<br />

- new model (P/N 263 900 002).<br />

6.11.1 Relay Module Characteristics<br />

6 - 50 en-938816/5<br />

Relay module P/N 263 900 002<br />

MOD. RELAYAGE 24 S<br />

Relay module P/N 263 202 931 P/N 263 900 002<br />

Location remote remote<br />

24 outputs via relays outputs <strong>and</strong> complemented outputs outputs <strong>and</strong> complemented outputs<br />

Output power supply group 1: S00 to S0F (16 outputs) power supply common to all outputs<br />

supplied by AL00<br />

group 2: S10 to S17 (8 outputs)<br />

supplied by AL03<br />

Power consumption group 1: maximum 12.8 W maximum 24 W<br />

group 2: maximum 6.4 W (all outputs switched)<br />

(all outputs switched)<br />

Power supply current group 1: 533 mA 1.1 A<br />

group 2: 267 mA<br />

Isolation voltage between 4 kV 4 kV<br />

inputs (Sub.D) <strong>and</strong> outputs<br />

Isolation with respect to the rail 2.5 kV 2.5 kV<br />

Wire sizes 0.2 to 2.5 mm 2 multistr<strong>and</strong> or 0.2 to 4 mm 2 single str<strong>and</strong><br />

Display 24 LEDs (LED lit for high level) 24 LEDs (LED lit for high level)


6.11.1.1 Characteristics of the Relays<br />

Maximum output current 8 A<br />

Thermal current see derating curve<br />

Operating voltages 24 VDC or 48 VDC<br />

24, 48, 110 or 220 VAC<br />

Maximum voltages 125 VDC<br />

250 VAC<br />

Mechanical life 30,000,000 operations<br />

Electrical endurance see endurance tables<br />

Response time at 20˚C <strong>and</strong> at nominal voltage operating: 10 ms<br />

release: 5 ms<br />

bounce: 10 ms<br />

Relays approved by NUM: SCHRACK RP418024 <strong>and</strong> OMRON GR21-24V.<br />

6.11.1.2 Electrical Endurance According to the Load<br />

The numbers of operations are statistical values supplied only for reference.<br />

AC voltage, resistive load (category AC1)<br />

Voltage Current Number of operations<br />

24-250 VAC 5 A 200,000<br />

24-250 VAC 2 A 1,000,000<br />

AC voltage, inductive load, 0.3 < power factor < 0.7 (category AC11)<br />

Voltage Current Number of operations<br />

24-250 VAC 2 A 500,000<br />

24-250 VAC 1 A 2,000,000<br />

24-250 VAC 0.4 A 5,000,000<br />

DC voltage, resistive load (category DC1)<br />

Voltage Current Number of operations<br />

24 VDC 1 A 1,000,000<br />

DC voltage, inductive load, L/R = 40 ms (category DC11)<br />

Voltage Current Number of operations<br />

24 VDC 1 A 250,000<br />

48 VDC 0.4 A 250,000<br />

Cards<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 51<br />

6


6.11.1.3 Derating Curve<br />

5<br />

3<br />

1<br />

6 - 52 en-938816/5<br />

Load current<br />

per contact (A)<br />

10 20 30 40 50 60<br />

Switching<br />

Continuous<br />

Ambient<br />

temperature (°C)<br />

6.11.2 Wiring <strong>and</strong> Customising of Relay Module P/N 263 900 002<br />

24 VDC<br />

Power supply wiring<br />

AL- AL+ AL- AL+<br />

Ladder marking area<br />

MOD. RELAYAGE 24 S<br />

00 01 02 ... xx<br />

... 22 23<br />

xx1 xx2 xx3<br />

Output wiring<br />

Output Sxx<br />

Complement /Sxx<br />

Common xx<br />

xx = output number (00 to 23)


Cards<br />

6.11.2.1 Wiring of the Outputs <strong>and</strong> Power Supply<br />

The 24 outputs S00 to S23 (<strong>and</strong> their complements) are available on the relay module output terminals.<br />

The relay module is supplied with 24 VDC on terminals AL- <strong>and</strong> AL+ of one of the two power supply terminal blocks.<br />

6.11.2.2 Customising the Relay Module - Correspondence with Ladder Notation<br />

A relay module can be connected to the output connector (32-input/24-output card), to the low part of the output<br />

connector (32-24 I/O card or first 24 outputs of the 64-48 I/O card) or to the high part of the connector (next 24 outputs,<br />

only with a 64-48 I/O card). The table below gives the correspondence between the marking of the relay module<br />

terminals <strong>and</strong> Ladder notation:<br />

Output Sxx S00 to S07 S08 to S15 S16 to S23<br />

First 24 outputs O 00.0 to O 00.7 O 01.0 to O 01.7 O 02.0 to O 02.7<br />

Next 24 outputs (64-48 I/O card) O 03.0 to O 03.7 O 04.0 to O 04.7 O 05.0 to O 05.7<br />

The relay module includes a marking area for Ladder notation. Detail of the marking area:<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7<br />

White space for writing with felt pen<br />

The numbers to be written in the marking area are:<br />

- 0, 1 <strong>and</strong> 2 when the relay module is connected to the low part of the output connector or to the 32-input/24-output<br />

card connector,<br />

- 3, 4, <strong>and</strong> 5 when the relay module is connected to the high part of the output connector.<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 53<br />

6


6.11.3 Wiring of Relay Module P/N 263 202 931<br />

6.11.3.1 Wiring of the Outputs <strong>and</strong> Power Supply<br />

The 24 outputs S00 to S17 (<strong>and</strong> their complements) are available on the relay module output terminals:<br />

S00<br />

xx4 xx2<br />

6 - 54 en-938816/5<br />

MOD. RELAYAGE 24 S<br />

X17 X18 X19<br />

xx1 xx1<br />

Output wiring<br />

Complemented output /Sxx<br />

Output Sxx<br />

Common xx<br />

xx = output number (00 to 17)<br />

6.11.3.2 Power Supply Wiring <strong>and</strong> Positioning of the Straps<br />

The relay module can be supplied by one or two power supply sources.<br />

Single Power Supply<br />

COM<br />

24 VDC<br />

+AL00 +AL01<br />

X17 X18<br />

+AL02 +AL03<br />

+AL01<br />

+AL02<br />

+AL00<br />

OFF<br />

24-OUTPUT RELAY MODULE<br />

OFF<br />

+AL02<br />

OFF X19<br />

+AL03<br />

S17


Two Power Supplies<br />

COM<br />

24 VDC<br />

24 VDC<br />

+AL00 +AL01<br />

X17 X18<br />

+AL02 +AL03<br />

+AL01<br />

+AL02<br />

+AL00<br />

OFF<br />

24-OUTPUT RELAY MODULE<br />

OFF<br />

+AL02<br />

OFF X19<br />

+AL03<br />

Cards<br />

The double power supply can be used, for instance, when part of the outputs are to be supplied with 24 VDC UPS (case<br />

of safety daisy chain).<br />

6.11.3.3 Correspondence with Ladder Notation<br />

A relay module can be connected to the output connector (32-input/24-output card), to the low part of the output<br />

connector (32-24 I/O card or first 24 outputs of the 64-48 I/O card) or to the high part of the connector (next 24 outputs,<br />

only with a 64-48 I/O card). The table below gives the correspondence between the marking of the relay module<br />

terminals <strong>and</strong> Ladder notation:<br />

Output Sxx S00 to S07 S08 to S0F S10 to S17<br />

First 24 outputs O 00.0 to O 00.7 O 01.0 to O 01.7 O 02.0 to O 02.7<br />

Next 24 outputs (64-48 I/O card) O 03.0 to O 03.7 O 04.0 to O 04.7 O 05.0 to O 05.7<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 55<br />

6


6.12 32-Input Card<br />

6.12.1 32-Input Card with Trelec Connectors<br />

COM 0<br />

00.0<br />

00.1<br />

00.2<br />

00.3<br />

00.4<br />

00.5<br />

00.6<br />

00.7<br />

01.0<br />

01.1<br />

01.2<br />

01.3<br />

01.4<br />

01.5<br />

01.6<br />

01.7<br />

COM 1<br />

COM 2<br />

02.0<br />

02.1<br />

02.2<br />

02.3<br />

02.4<br />

02.5<br />

02.6<br />

02.7<br />

03.0<br />

03.1<br />

03.2<br />

03.3<br />

03.4<br />

03.5<br />

03.6<br />

03.7<br />

COM 3<br />

32 E<br />

6 - 56 en-938816/5<br />

Power consumption 8.44 W maximum (all inputs switched)<br />

Location in the continuity of the input/output cards<br />

(see 4.1.1 <strong>and</strong> 4.1.2).<br />

32 discrete inputs divided into four groups<br />

Input values<br />

Nominal voltage<br />

Maximum current rating<br />

Encoder power supply<br />

24 VDC<br />

8 mA per input<br />

19.4-30 VDC<br />

Reverse voltage<br />

capability<br />

30 V continuous<br />

Operating ranges Low level: 0-5 V (current ≤ 1 mA)<br />

High level: 13.2 - 30 V (current > 4 mA)<br />

Input impedances Low level: 5000 ohms<br />

High level: 2700 to 3750 ohms<br />

Reverse voltage 30 VDC continuous<br />

Response time 10 ms<br />

Dielectric strength at 50 Hz 1500 Vrms between groups of channels<br />

1500 Vrms between channel group <strong>and</strong><br />

internal bus<br />

Impedance of external lines < 500 ohms<br />

Connection capacity 1x2.5 mm2 wire, 2x1.5 mm2 wire or 3x1 mm2 wire<br />

Display 32 LEDs on the top of the front pane<br />

LED lit: high level<br />

Sensor common positive power supply conductor<br />

Logic positive (current draw)<br />

The 32-input cards receive logic signals from the machine <strong>and</strong> its environment <strong>and</strong><br />

transmit them to the machine processor card.<br />

The 32-input cards can:<br />

- communicate with the machine processor card via the serial bus,<br />

- receive input signals via the front panel connectors.<br />

REMARK Two versions of the 32-input card of Trelec connectors are available with different<br />

silk-screening on the front (see 6.12.3).


6.12.2 32-Input Card with LMI Connectors<br />

,, COM 0<br />

,, 00.0<br />

,, 00.1<br />

,, 00.2<br />

,, 00.3<br />

,, 00.4<br />

,, 00.5<br />

,, 00.6<br />

,, 00.7<br />

,, 01.0<br />

,, 01.1<br />

,, 01.2<br />

,, 01.3<br />

,, 01.4<br />

,, 01.5<br />

,, 01.6<br />

,, 01.7<br />

,, COM 1<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

,<br />

COM 2<br />

02.0<br />

02.1<br />

02.2<br />

02.3<br />

02.4<br />

02.5<br />

02.6<br />

02.7<br />

03.0<br />

03.1<br />

03.2<br />

03.3<br />

03.4<br />

03.5<br />

03.6<br />

03.7<br />

COM 3<br />

32 E<br />

Cards<br />

Power consumption maximum 8.44 W (all inputs switched)<br />

Location in the continuation of the input/output cards<br />

(see 4.1.1 <strong>and</strong> 4.1.2).<br />

32 discrete inputs in four groups<br />

Input ratings<br />

nominal voltage<br />

current rating<br />

sensor power supply<br />

24 VDC<br />

8 mA per input<br />

19.4 to 30 VDC<br />

Reverse voltage withst<strong>and</strong> 30 VDC continuous<br />

Operating ranges low level: 0-5 V (current ⎺≤ 1 mA)<br />

high level: 13.2-30 V (current > 4 mA)<br />

Input impedances low level: 5000 ohms<br />

high level: 2700 to 3750 ohms<br />

Reverse voltage withst<strong>and</strong> 30 VDC continuous<br />

Response time 10 ms<br />

50 Hz isolation voltage 1500 Vrms between groups of channels<br />

1500 Vrms between groups of channels <strong>and</strong><br />

internal bus<br />

External line impedance < 500 Ω<br />

Wire sizes 1 x 2.5 mm2 wire or 2 x 1.5 mm2 wires<br />

Display 32 LEDs at the top of the front panel<br />

LED lit: high level<br />

Sensor common positive power supply terminal<br />

Logic positive (current sink)<br />

The 32-input cards receive logic signals from the machine <strong>and</strong> its environment <strong>and</strong><br />

send them to the machine processor card.<br />

The 32-input cards can:<br />

- communicate with the machine processor card via the serial bus,<br />

- receive input signals via front panel connectors.<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 57<br />

6


6.12.3 32-Input Card Connection Diagram<br />

Card with LMI connectors<br />

,, COM 0<br />

,, 00.0<br />

,, 00.1<br />

,, 00.2<br />

,, 00.3<br />

,, 00.4<br />

,, 00.5<br />

,, 00.6<br />

,, 00.7<br />

,, 01.0<br />

,, 01.1<br />

,, 01.2<br />

,, 01.3<br />

,, 01.4<br />

,, 01.5<br />

,, 01.6<br />

,, 01.7<br />

,, COM 1<br />

, COM 2<br />

, 02.0<br />

, 02.1<br />

, 02.2<br />

, 02.3<br />

, 02.4<br />

, 02.5<br />

, 02.6<br />

, 02.7<br />

, 03.0<br />

, 03.1<br />

, 03.2<br />

, 03.3<br />

, 03.4<br />

, 03.5<br />

, 03.6<br />

,<br />

03.7<br />

,<br />

COM 3<br />

32 E<br />

6 - 58 en-938816/5<br />

Card with Trelec connectors<br />

Old silk screening New silk screening<br />

COM 0<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

E<br />

F<br />

COM 1<br />

COM 2<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

E<br />

F<br />

COM 3<br />

ADR<br />

32 E<br />

COM 0<br />

00.0<br />

00.1<br />

00.2<br />

00.3<br />

00.4<br />

00.5<br />

00.6<br />

00.7<br />

01.0<br />

01.1<br />

01.2<br />

01.3<br />

01.4<br />

01.5<br />

01.6<br />

01.7<br />

COM 1<br />

COM 2<br />

02.0<br />

02.1<br />

02.2<br />

02.3<br />

02.4<br />

02.5<br />

02.6<br />

02.7<br />

03.0<br />

03.1<br />

03.2<br />

03.3<br />

03.4<br />

03.5<br />

03.6<br />

03.7<br />

COM 3<br />

32 E<br />

1 - 32-input cable:<br />

- with Trelec connector (see 7.4.7)<br />

- with LMI connector (see 7.4.8)<br />

1<br />

Inputs<br />

+24VI<br />

+15V<br />

+5V<br />

+24VE<br />

-15V<br />

Pw Fail<br />

RaZ<br />

24 VE<br />

0 VE<br />

Alim<br />

FO<br />

Em<br />

Rec


6.13 32-Output Card<br />

6.13.1 General<br />

00.0:WD<br />

COM 0<br />

00.1<br />

COM 1<br />

00.2<br />

00.3<br />

00.4<br />

00.5<br />

00.6<br />

00.7<br />

01.0<br />

01.1<br />

01.2<br />

01.3<br />

01.4<br />

01.5<br />

01.6<br />

01.7<br />

COM 2<br />

02.0<br />

02.1<br />

02.2<br />

02.3<br />

02.4<br />

02.5<br />

02.6<br />

02.7<br />

03.0<br />

03.1<br />

03.2<br />

03.3<br />

03.4<br />

03.5<br />

03.6<br />

03.7<br />

COM 3<br />

32 S<br />

Cards<br />

Power consumption 6.4 W maximum (all outputs switched)<br />

Location in the continuity of the input/output cards<br />

(see 4.1.1 <strong>and</strong> 4.1.2).<br />

32 relay outputs group 1: one output O 00.0 (WD)<br />

group 2: one output O 00.1<br />

group 3: 14 outputs O 00.2 to O 01.7<br />

group 4: 16 outputs O 02.0 to O 03.7<br />

Operating voltages 24 or 48 VDC<br />

24-30 VAC<br />

Electrical characteristics see 6.13.3.1<br />

Electrical endurance see 6.13.3.2<br />

Maximum current rating<br />

per output group<br />

5 A continuous on the common<br />

Leakage current per output<br />

in the open state<br />

< 1 mA at 110 VAC<br />

< 2 mA at 230 VAC<br />

Response times at 20 °C<br />

at nominal voltage<br />

closing: 10 ms<br />

release: 5 ms<br />

bounce: 2 ms<br />

AC protection<br />

overloads <strong>and</strong> short-circuits<br />

inductive overloads<br />

1 fuse per group of channels<br />

varistor 275 V + RC circuit: R = 10 ohms,<br />

C = 22 nF<br />

DC protection<br />

overloads <strong>and</strong> short-circuits<br />

inductive overloads<br />

1 fuse per group of channels<br />

none (provide an external discharge diode)<br />

Fuses 2 (+ 1 spare): 250 V - 5 A - Radial Reference type<br />

172.908 Cehess Technologia<br />

4 or 2 st<strong>and</strong>ards: 20 x 5 - 250 V - 5 A - type F1T<br />

Dielectric strength at 50 Hz 1500 Vrms between channels<br />

1500 Vrms between channel groups<br />

1500 Vrms between channel groups <strong>and</strong><br />

internal bus<br />

Connection capacity 1 x 2.5 mm2 wire, 2 x 1.5 mm2 wire or<br />

3 x 1 mm2 wires<br />

Display 32 LEDs at the top of the front panel<br />

LED lit: high level<br />

The 32-output cards send the machine the logic control signals from the machine<br />

processor card.<br />

The 32-output cards can:<br />

- communicate with the machine processor via the serial bus,<br />

- send output signals via the front panel connectors.<br />

REMARK When the watchdog (see 4.4.2) is assigned to the 32 I/24 O card, it corresponds to<br />

output OUT.0 of this card.<br />

Two versions of the 32-output card of Trelec connectors are available with different<br />

silk-screening on the front (see 6.13.4.1).<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 59<br />

6


6.13.2 32-Output Card with LMI Connectors<br />

,, 00.0:WD<br />

,, COM _WD<br />

,, 00.1<br />

,, 00.2<br />

,, 00.3<br />

,, 00.4<br />

,, 00.5<br />

,, 00.6<br />

,, 00.7<br />

,, 01.0<br />

,, 01.1<br />

,, 01.2<br />

,, 01.3<br />

,, 01.4<br />

,, 01.5<br />

,, 01.6<br />

,, 01.7<br />

COM A<br />

,,<br />

,, 02.0<br />

,, 02.1<br />

,, 02.2<br />

,, 02.3<br />

,, 02.4<br />

,, 02.5<br />

,, 02.6<br />

,, 02.7<br />

,, COMB<br />

,, 03.0<br />

,, 03.1<br />

,, 03.2<br />

,, 03.3<br />

,, 03.4<br />

,, 03.5<br />

,,<br />

03.6<br />

,,<br />

03.7<br />

COM B<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

32 S<br />

6 - 60 en-938816/5<br />

Power consumption maximum 6.4 W (all outputs switched)<br />

Location in the continuation of the input/output cards<br />

(see 4.1.1 <strong>and</strong> 4.1.2).<br />

32 relay outputs group 1: one output O 00.0 (WD)<br />

group 2: 15 outputs O 00.2 to O 01.7<br />

group 4: 16 outputs O 02.0 to O 03.7<br />

Operating voltages 24 VDC or 48 VDC<br />

24 VAC to 230 VAC<br />

Operating characteristics see 6.13.3.1<br />

Electric endurance see 6.13.3.2<br />

Maximum current per<br />

group of outputs<br />

10 A continuous on the common wire<br />

Leakage current per output<br />

in open state<br />

< 1 mA at 110 VAC<br />

< 2 mA at 230 VAC<br />

Response time at 20°C<br />

at nominal voltage<br />

rise time: 10 ms<br />

cutoff: 5 ms<br />

bounce: 2 ms<br />

AC protection<br />

overloads <strong>and</strong> short-circuit<br />

inductive overvoltages<br />

1 fuse per group of channels<br />

GMOV 275 V + RC circuit: R = 10 ohms, C = 22 nF<br />

DC protection<br />

overloads <strong>and</strong> short-circuit<br />

inductive overvoltages<br />

1 fuse per group of channels<br />

none (provide an external discharge diode)<br />

Fuses 2 (+ 1 spare): 250 V, 5A, radial lead type<br />

Cehess Technologie P/N 172.908<br />

4 st<strong>and</strong>ards: 20 x 5, 250 V, 5A, type F1T<br />

50 Hz isolation voltage 1500 Vrms between channels<br />

1500 Vrms between groups of channels<br />

1500 Vrms between groups of channels <strong>and</strong><br />

internal bus<br />

Wire size 1 x 2.5 mm2 wire or 2 x 1.5 mm2 wires<br />

Display 32 LEDs at the top of the front edge<br />

LED lit: high level<br />

The 32-output cards send logic control signals from the machine processor card to<br />

the machine.<br />

The 32-output cards can:<br />

- communicate with the machine processor card via the serial bus,<br />

- send output signals via the front panel connectors.<br />

REMARK When the watchdog (see 4.4.2) is assigned to the 32 I/24 O card, it corresponds to<br />

output OUT.0 of this card.


6.13.3 Output Characteristics<br />

6.13.3.1 Electrical Characteristics<br />

AC Voltage<br />

50 Hz, one million cycles, maximum rate: 1800 cycles/hour.<br />

Cards<br />

Voltage Current into resistive load<br />

(category AC1)<br />

Current into inductive load<br />

(category AC11)<br />

24 V 0.8 A 0.8 A<br />

48 V 0.6 A 0.6 A<br />

110 V 0.5 A 0.5 A<br />

230 V 0.25 A 0.2 A<br />

Provide an interference suppression RC circuit across the load coils (R > 50 ohms, 47 nF < C < 1 mF according to the<br />

load)<br />

DC Voltage<br />

One million cycles, maximum rate: 1800 cycles/hour<br />

Voltage Current into resistive load Current into inductive load<br />

(category DC1) (category DC11 with L/R = 10 ms)<br />

24 V 0.8 A 0.4 A<br />

48 V 0.5 A /<br />

6.13.3.2 Electrical Endurance According to the Load<br />

The numbers of cycles are statistical values given only for guidance.<br />

AC Voltage, Resistive Load (category AC1)<br />

Voltage Current Number of cycles<br />

24 V 2 A 200 000<br />

24 / 48 V 1 A 500 000<br />

110 / 230 V 3 A 10 000<br />

110 / 230 V 1 A 200 000<br />

110 / 230 V 0.5 A 2 000 000<br />

AC Voltage, Inductive Load (category AC11)<br />

Voltage Current Number of cycles<br />

24 V 1.04 A 200 000<br />

24 V 0.38 A 3 000 000<br />

48 V 0.52 A 200 000<br />

48 V 0.19 A 10 000 000<br />

230 V 0.23 A 2 000 000<br />

230 V 0.04 A 10 000 000<br />

DC Voltage, Resistive Load (category DC1)<br />

Voltage Current Number of cycles<br />

24 V 1 A 200 000<br />

48 V 1 A 50 000<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 61<br />

6


6.13.4 32-Output Card Connection Diagram<br />

6.13.4.1 Wiring of the 32-Output Card with Trelec Connector<br />

Old silk screening New silk screening<br />

0:WD<br />

COM 0<br />

1<br />

COM 1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

E<br />

F<br />

COM 2<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

E<br />

F<br />

COM 3<br />

ADR<br />

32 S<br />

6 - 62 en-938816/5<br />

00.0:WD<br />

COM 0<br />

00.1<br />

COM 1<br />

00.2<br />

00.3<br />

00.4<br />

00.5<br />

00.6<br />

00.7<br />

01.0<br />

01.1<br />

01.2<br />

01.3<br />

01.4<br />

01.5<br />

01.6<br />

01.7<br />

COM 2<br />

02.0<br />

02.1<br />

02.2<br />

02.3<br />

02.4<br />

02.5<br />

02.6<br />

02.7<br />

03.0<br />

03.1<br />

03.2<br />

03.3<br />

03.4<br />

03.5<br />

03.6<br />

03.7<br />

COM 3<br />

32 S<br />

1<br />

Loads<br />

1 - 32-output cable with Trelec connector (see 7.4.9)<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

Group 1 power supply<br />

Group 2 power supply<br />

Group 3 power supply<br />

Group 4 power supply


6.13.4.2 Wiring of the 32-Output Card with LMI Connector<br />

,, 00.0:WD<br />

,, COM _WD<br />

,, 00.1<br />

,, 00.2<br />

,, 00.3<br />

,, 00.4<br />

,, 00.5<br />

,, 00.6<br />

,, 00.7<br />

,, 01.0<br />

,, 01.1<br />

,, 01.2<br />

,, 01.3<br />

,, 01.4<br />

,, 01.5<br />

,, 01.6<br />

,, 01.7<br />

COM A<br />

,,<br />

,, 02.0<br />

,, 02.1<br />

,, 02.2<br />

,, 02.3<br />

,, 02.4<br />

,, 02.5<br />

,, 02.6<br />

,, 02.7<br />

,, COMB<br />

,, 03.0<br />

,, 03.1<br />

,, 03.2<br />

,,<br />

03.3<br />

,,<br />

03.4<br />

,,<br />

03.5<br />

03.6<br />

,,<br />

03.7<br />

,,<br />

COM B<br />

,,<br />

32 S<br />

1<br />

Loads<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

1 - 32-output cable with LMI connector (see 7.4.10)<br />

REMARK The COMB common lines are interconnected.<br />

Group 1 power supply<br />

Group 2 power supply<br />

Group 3 power supply<br />

Cards<br />

en-938816/5 6 - 63<br />

6


6 - 64 en-938816/5


Cables<br />

7 Cables<br />

7.1 Communication Cables 7 - 5<br />

7.1.1 RS 232 Serial Interface Cable 7 - 5<br />

7.1.2 RS 422 Serial Interface <strong>and</strong> High-Speed<br />

Line Cable 7 - 6<br />

7.1.3 RS 485 Serial Interface Cable 7 - 7<br />

7.1.4 TTL Output/Adapter Connecting Cable 7 - 8<br />

7.1.5 RS 232 Adapter serial Link Cable 7 - 9<br />

7.1.6 RS 485 Adapter Serial Link Cable 7 - 10<br />

7.1.7 Serial Line Relay Cable Connected to<br />

Compact Panel 7 - 11<br />

7.1.7.1 RS 232 Line Relay Cable Connected to<br />

Compact Panel 7 - 11<br />

7.1.7.2 RS 422 or RS 485 Line Relay Cable<br />

Connected to Compact Panel 7 - 12<br />

7.1.8 Serial Line Relay Cable Connected to<br />

Machine Panel 7 - 13<br />

7.1.8.1 RS 232 Line Relay Cable Connected to<br />

Machine Panel 7 - 13<br />

7.1.8.2 RS 422 or RS 485 Line Relay Cable<br />

Connected to Machine Panel 7 - 14<br />

7.1.9 RS 232 Serial Interface Cable for NUM<br />

Diskette Drive 7 - 15<br />

7.1.10 RS 422 Serial Interface Cable for NUM<br />

Diskette Drive 7 - 16<br />

7.2 Axis Cables 7 - 17<br />

7.2.1 Axis Encoder Cable - Power Supply<br />

Provided by the Card 7 - 17<br />

7.2.1.1 Incremental Axis Encoder Cable<br />

Connected to the Axis Card,<br />

Power Supply Provided by the Card 7 - 17<br />

7.2.1.2 Incremental Axis Encoder Cable<br />

Connected to an Axis Interface Module 7 - 19<br />

7.2.2 Absolute SSI Axis Encoder Cable 7 - 21<br />

7.2.2.1 Absolute SSI Axis Encoder Cable<br />

Connected to the Axis Card, Power<br />

Supply Provided by the Card 7 - 21<br />

7.2.2.2 Absolute SSI Axis Encoder Cable<br />

Connected to an Axis Interface Module 7 - 23<br />

7.2.3 Semiabsolute SSI Axis Encoder Cable 7 - 25<br />

7.2.3.1 Semiabsolute SSI Axis Encoder Cable<br />

Connected to the Axis Card, Power<br />

Supply Provided by the Card 7 - 25<br />

7.2.3.2 Semiabsolute SSI Axis Encoder<br />

Connected to an Axis Interface Module 7 - 27<br />

7.2.4 Combined Axis Encoder Cable: SSI +<br />

Incremental - Sinusoidal Pulses 7 - 29<br />

7.2.4.1 Combined Axis Encoder Cable: SSI +<br />

Incremental - Sinusoidal Pulses -<br />

Connected to the Axis Card,<br />

Power Supply Provided by the Card 7 - 29<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 1<br />

7


7.2.4.2 Combined Axis Encoder Cable: SSI +<br />

Incremental - Sinusoidal Pulses -<br />

Connected to an Axis Interface Module 7 - 31<br />

7.2.5 Combined Axis Encoder Cable: SSI +<br />

Incremental - Square Pulses 7 - 33<br />

7.2.5.1 Combined Axis Encoder Cable: SSI +<br />

Incremental - Square Pulses - Connected<br />

to the Axis Card, Power Supply Provided<br />

by the Card 7 - 33<br />

7.2.5.2 Combined Axis Encoder Cable : SSI +<br />

Incremental - Square Pulses -<br />

Connected to an Axis Interface Module 7 - 35<br />

7.2.6 Axes With External Power Supply 7 - 37<br />

7.2.7 Settings on an Axis Interface Module 7 - 38<br />

7.2.8 H<strong>and</strong>wheel Cables with Nondifferential<br />

Outputs 7 - 40<br />

7.2.9 H<strong>and</strong>wheel Cable with Differential Outputs 7 - 41<br />

7.2.10 General Information on Axis Cables 7 - 42<br />

7.2.10.1 Alternate Wiring With Power Supply<br />

Provided by the Card 7 - 42<br />

7.2.10.2 Physical Addresses of the Axes 7 - 42<br />

7.3 Analogue I/O, Interrupt <strong>and</strong> Timer Cables 7 - 44<br />

7.3.1 Analogue I/O <strong>and</strong> Interrupt Cable for<br />

UC SII Processor 7 - 44<br />

7.3.2 Analogue I/O Cable for Version 2 Machine<br />

Processor 7 - 46<br />

7.3.3 Analogue I/O-Timer Cable for Version 1<br />

Machine Processor 7 - 47<br />

7.3.4 Machine Processor Interrupt Input Cable 7 - 48<br />

7.3.5 IT/Serial Line Card Interrupt Input Cable 7 - 49<br />

7.3.6 8 Analogue Input Cable 7 - 50<br />

7.3.7 8 Analogue Output/Reference Voltage<br />

Cable 7 - 52<br />

7.3.8 Wiring of the Analogue Inputs 7 - 54<br />

7.3.8.1 Recommended Wiring of the Analogue<br />

Inputs 7 - 54<br />

7.3.8.2 Alternative Analogue Input Wiring 7 - 55<br />

7.4 Input <strong>and</strong> Output Cables 7 - 56<br />

7.4.1 32-Input Cable of the 64-48 I/O <strong>and</strong><br />

32-24 I/O Cards 7 - 56<br />

7.4.2 24-Output Cable of the 64-48 I/O <strong>and</strong><br />

32-24 I/O Cards 7 - 58<br />

7.4.3 Polarising <strong>and</strong> Customising the Cables<br />

of the 64-48 I/O <strong>and</strong> 32-24 I/O Cards 7 - 60<br />

7.4.3.1 Polarising the Input <strong>and</strong> Output Cables 7 - 60<br />

7.4.3.2 Customising the Cables of the High or<br />

Low Part 7 - 60<br />

7.4.3.3 Installing <strong>and</strong> Locking the Cables 7 - 61<br />

7 - 2 en-938816/5


Cables<br />

7.4.4 32-Input Cable (with or without general<br />

power supply of the inputs) for 32 I/24 O<br />

Card <strong>and</strong> Machine Panel Extension 7 - 62<br />

7.4.5 32 I / 24 O Card 24-Output Cable 7 - 64<br />

7.4.6 Machine Panel Extension 24-Output Cable<br />

(with or without external power supply) 7 - 66<br />

7.4.7 32-Input Cable with Trelec Connector 7 - 68<br />

7.4.8 32-Input Cable with LMI Connector 7 - 69<br />

7.4.9 32-Output Cable with Trelec Connector 7 - 70<br />

7.4.10 32-Output Cable with LMI Connector 7 - 71<br />

7.5 Power Cables 7 - 72<br />

7.5.1 Power Cable 7 - 72<br />

7.5.2 32-Input/24-Output Card Input External<br />

Power Cable 7 - 73<br />

7.5.3 Machine Panel <strong>and</strong> Extension Power Cable 7 - 73<br />

7.5.4 NUM Diskette Drive Power Cable 7 - 74<br />

7.5.5 50-Key LCD Panel Power Cable 7 - 75<br />

7.6 Video Cable 7 - 76<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 3<br />

7


7 - 4 en-938816/4


7.1 Communication Cables<br />

7.1.1 RS 232 Serial Interface Cable<br />

Cables<br />

This cable can be adapted to suit the peripheral device by not wiring the signals that are not going to be used <strong>and</strong> by<br />

using an appropriate connector (see peripheral <strong>manual</strong>).<br />

9<br />

6<br />

5<br />

1<br />

9 contacts<br />

Solder side<br />

15<br />

9<br />

8<br />

1<br />

15 contacts<br />

TD<br />

RD<br />

RTS<br />

CTS<br />

DTR<br />

DSR<br />

DCD<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

25<br />

14<br />

13<br />

1<br />

25 contacts<br />

Sub.D<br />

9 contacts<br />

3<br />

GND 5<br />

2<br />

7<br />

8<br />

4 ∗<br />

6 ∗<br />

1 ∗<br />

Sub.D<br />

15 contacts<br />

1<br />

7<br />

3<br />

12<br />

5<br />

14<br />

6<br />

13<br />

1 2 3<br />

1 - Male Sub.D connector plug:<br />

- 25 contacts on machine processor, <strong>CN</strong>C processor <strong>and</strong> UC SII CPU<br />

- 15 contacts on IT/serial line card<br />

- 9 contacts on the V2 machine processor, V2 <strong>CN</strong>C processor <strong>and</strong><br />

UC SII CPU<br />

2 - Shielded cable depending on the peripheral device (2 twisted pairs <strong>and</strong> 4<br />

conductors for complete connection, minimum size 0.2 mm 2 )<br />

3 - Connector plug depending on the peripheral device<br />

Sub.D<br />

25 contacts<br />

2<br />

7<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

20<br />

6<br />

8<br />

CONNECTOR<br />

SHELL<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

RD<br />

GND<br />

TD<br />

CTS<br />

RTS<br />

DSR<br />

DTR<br />

DCD<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

∗ Contacts 1, 4 <strong>and</strong> 6 are not wired on 9-contact connectors of the V2 machine processor <strong>and</strong> V2 <strong>CN</strong>C processor.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 5<br />

7


7.1.2 RS 422 Serial Interface <strong>and</strong> High-Speed Line Cable<br />

9<br />

6<br />

Solder side<br />

9 contacts<br />

15<br />

15 contacts<br />

7 - 6 en-938816/5<br />

5<br />

1<br />

9<br />

T(A) +<br />

T(B) -<br />

R(A) +<br />

R(B) -<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

8<br />

1<br />

Sub.D<br />

9 contacts<br />

9<br />

4<br />

6<br />

1<br />

1<br />

2 3<br />

1 - Male Sub.D connector:<br />

- 15 contacts on IT/serial line card <strong>and</strong> high-speed<br />

line of V2 <strong>CN</strong>C processor<br />

- 9 contacts on the V2 machine processor <strong>and</strong><br />

V2 <strong>CN</strong>C processor<br />

2 - Shielding twisted 2-pairs <strong>and</strong> one isolated wire<br />

3 - Sub.D connector plug depending on the application<br />

Sub.D<br />

15 contacts<br />

2<br />

9<br />

4<br />

11<br />

0 V 5 7 0 V<br />

CONNECTOR<br />

SHELL<br />

! CAUTION<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

R(A) +<br />

R(B) -<br />

T(A) +<br />

T(B) -<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.


7.1.3 RS 485 Serial Interface Cable<br />

9<br />

6<br />

Solder side<br />

5<br />

1<br />

9 contacts<br />

15<br />

9<br />

8<br />

1<br />

15 contacts<br />

T(A) +<br />

T(B) -<br />

R(A) +<br />

R(B) -<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

Sub.D<br />

9 contacts<br />

9<br />

4<br />

6<br />

1<br />

1<br />

2 3<br />

1 - Male Sub.D connector:<br />

- 15 contacts on IT/serial line card<br />

- 9 contacts on the V2 machine processor <strong>and</strong><br />

V2 <strong>CN</strong>C processor<br />

2 - Shielding twisted 2-pairs <strong>and</strong> one isolated wire<br />

3 - Sub.D connector plug depending on the application<br />

Sub.D<br />

15 contacts<br />

2<br />

9<br />

4<br />

11<br />

0 V 5 7 0 V<br />

CONNECTOR<br />

SHELL<br />

! CAUTION<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

R(A) / T(A) +<br />

R(B) / T(B) -<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

Cables<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 7<br />

7


7.1.4 TTL Output/Adapter Connecting Cable<br />

Solder side 1<br />

2 3<br />

4<br />

Solder side<br />

9<br />

6<br />

5<br />

1<br />

7 - 8 en-938816/4<br />

10 cm<br />

1 - 9-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Shielded 6-wire cable (6x0.22 mm 2 ), maximum length 1 m<br />

3 - Wire <strong>and</strong> terminal for M3 screw (only for adapters at index A or B)<br />

4 - 9-contact female Sub.D connector plug<br />

TD TTL 2 2 RD TTL<br />

RD TTL 4 4 TD TTL<br />

RTS TTL 3 3 CTS TTL<br />

CTS TTL<br />

DTR TTL<br />

DCD TTL<br />

DSR TTL<br />

6<br />

8<br />

7<br />

9<br />

∗ The resistors are required<br />

for cable lengths between<br />

0.3 m <strong>and</strong> 1 m<br />

6 RTS TTL<br />

or 0 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

0 V 5 5 0 V<br />

5 V 1<br />

1 5 V<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

4,7 kΩ 1/4 W ∗<br />

4,7 kΩ 1/4 W ∗<br />

ADAPTER<br />

COVER<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

5<br />

1<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

The link st<strong>and</strong>ard (RS232 or RS485) must be specified:<br />

- in the PLC programme if the line is used by the automatic control function (see Automatic Control Function<br />

Programming Manual), or<br />

- by the "serial line parameter setting" utility if the line is used by the <strong>CN</strong>C function (see Operator Manual).<br />

Modification of the Wiring for Use of St<strong>and</strong>ard RS485 (Software Index Below F)<br />

When the line is used to st<strong>and</strong>ard 485 <strong>and</strong> the <strong>CN</strong>C software index is below F, the wiring must be modified as follows:<br />

RTS TTL 3 3 CTS TTL<br />

CTS TTL 6 6 0 V<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

9<br />

6


7.1.5 RS 232 Adapter serial Link Cable<br />

Cables<br />

This cable can be adapted to suit the peripheral device by not wiring the signals that are not going to be used <strong>and</strong> by<br />

using an appropriate connector (see peripheral <strong>manual</strong>).<br />

Solder side 1 2 3<br />

25<br />

14<br />

13<br />

1<br />

TD<br />

GND<br />

RD<br />

RTS<br />

CTS<br />

DTR<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

2<br />

7<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

20<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

1 - 25-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Shielding cable depending on the peripheral device (2 twisted pairs <strong>and</strong> 3<br />

conductors for complete connection, minimum size 0.2 mm 2 )<br />

3 - Plug depending on the peripheral device<br />

! CAUTION<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

RD<br />

GND<br />

TD<br />

CTS<br />

RTS<br />

DSR<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 9<br />

7


7.1.6 RS 485 Adapter Serial Link Cable<br />

Solder side<br />

15<br />

7 - 10 en-938816/4<br />

9<br />

5 V isolated<br />

8<br />

1<br />

T(A) / R(A) +<br />

T(B) / R(B) -<br />

0 V isolated<br />

0 V isolated<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

14<br />

7<br />

15<br />

8<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

1<br />

2 3<br />

1 - 15-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Shielding twisted 2-pair cable<br />

3 - Sub.D connector plug depending on station<br />

! CAUTION<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

R(A) / T(A) +<br />

R(B) / T(B) -<br />

0 V<br />

0 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.


7.1.7 Serial Line Relay Cable Connected to Compact Panel<br />

7.1.7.1 RS 232 Line Relay Cable Connected to Compact Panel<br />

9<br />

6<br />

5<br />

1<br />

9 contacts<br />

Solder side<br />

15<br />

9<br />

8<br />

1<br />

15 contacts<br />

25<br />

14<br />

TD 3<br />

0 V 5<br />

RD<br />

RTS<br />

CTS<br />

DTR<br />

DSR<br />

DCD<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

Sub.D<br />

9 contacts<br />

2<br />

7<br />

8<br />

4 ∗<br />

6 ∗<br />

1 ∗<br />

13<br />

1<br />

25 contacts<br />

Sub.D<br />

15 contacts<br />

1<br />

7<br />

3<br />

12<br />

5<br />

14<br />

6<br />

13<br />

1<br />

2 3 4<br />

24 VDC<br />

,,<br />

,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,<br />

,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,<br />

,,,<br />

1 - Male Sub.D connector (see 7.1.1 for RS232 serial interface cable)<br />

2 - Shielded cable with 2 twisted pairs <strong>and</strong> 5 isolated conductors<br />

(minimum wire size 0.14 m 2 )<br />

3 - 2-wire cable (optional, for power supply of the NUM diskette drive)<br />

4 - Remote 9-contact female Sub.D connector on the compact panel<br />

Sub.D<br />

25 contacts<br />

2<br />

7<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

20<br />

6<br />

8<br />

CONNECTOR<br />

SHELL<br />

24 VDC<br />

3<br />

5<br />

9<br />

2<br />

7<br />

8<br />

4<br />

6<br />

1<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

TD<br />

RTS<br />

CTS<br />

DSR<br />

DCD<br />

Solder side<br />

6<br />

9<br />

0 V<br />

24 VDC<br />

RD<br />

∗ Contacts 1, 4 <strong>and</strong> 6 must not be wired on the 9-contact connector of the V2 machine processor.<br />

DTR<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

Cables<br />

If the 24 VDC conductor is wired (for occasional connection of the NUM diskette drive),<br />

do not connect the peripheral for which contact 9 is used (e.g. signal RI of the PC st<strong>and</strong>ard).<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 11<br />

1<br />

5<br />

7


7.1.7.2 RS 422 or RS 485 Line Relay Cable Connected to Compact Panel<br />

9<br />

6<br />

Solder side<br />

5<br />

1<br />

9 contacts<br />

15<br />

15 contacts<br />

7 - 12 en-938816/4<br />

9<br />

T(A) +<br />

8<br />

1<br />

T(B) -<br />

R(A) +<br />

R(B) -<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

Sub.D<br />

9 contacts<br />

9<br />

4<br />

6<br />

1<br />

Sub.D<br />

15 contacts<br />

2<br />

9<br />

4<br />

11<br />

0 V 5 7<br />

CONNECTOR<br />

SHELL<br />

1<br />

2 3 4<br />

24 VDC<br />

,,<br />

,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,<br />

,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,,,,<br />

,,,,,,<br />

,,,,<br />

,,<br />

Solder side<br />

1 - Male Sub.D connector:<br />

- 15 contacts on IT/serial line card<br />

- 9 contacts on V2 machine processor <strong>and</strong> UC SII CPU<br />

2 - Shielded cable with 2 twisted pairs <strong>and</strong> 1 isolated conductor<br />

(minimum wire size 0.14 m 2 )<br />

3 - 2-wire cable (optional, for power supply of the NUM diskette drive)<br />

4 - Remote 9-contact female Sub.D connector on compact panel<br />

! CAUTION<br />

24 VDC<br />

9<br />

4<br />

6<br />

1<br />

5<br />

7<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

T(A) +<br />

T(B) -<br />

6<br />

9<br />

R(A) +<br />

R(B) -<br />

0 V<br />

24 VDC<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

1<br />

5


7.1.8 Serial Line Relay Cable Connected to Machine Panel<br />

7.1.8.1 RS 232 Line Relay Cable Connected to Machine Panel<br />

This cable is a wire-to-wire cable between an RS 232 port <strong>and</strong> the 25-contact connector on the machine panel.<br />

9<br />

6<br />

5<br />

1<br />

9 contacts<br />

Solder side<br />

15<br />

9<br />

8<br />

1<br />

15 contacts<br />

25<br />

14<br />

TD 3<br />

0 V 5<br />

RD<br />

RTS<br />

CTS<br />

DTR<br />

DSR<br />

DCD<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

13<br />

1<br />

25 contacts<br />

Sub.D<br />

9 contacts<br />

2<br />

7<br />

8<br />

4 ∗<br />

6 ∗<br />

1 ∗<br />

Sub.D<br />

15 contacts<br />

1<br />

7<br />

3<br />

12<br />

5<br />

14<br />

6<br />

13<br />

1 2 3 4<br />

24 VDC<br />

1 - Male Sub.D connector (see 7.1.1 for RS232 serial interface cable)<br />

2 - Shielded cable with 2 twisted pairs <strong>and</strong> 5 isolated conductors<br />

(minimum wire size 0.14 m 2 )<br />

3 - 2-wire cable (optional, for power supply of the NUM diskette drive)<br />

4 - Remote 25-contact female Sub.D connector on machine panel<br />

Sub.D<br />

25 contacts<br />

2<br />

7<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

20<br />

6<br />

8<br />

CONNECTOR<br />

SHELL<br />

24 VDC<br />

2<br />

7<br />

24<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

20<br />

6<br />

8<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

TD<br />

0 V<br />

24 VDC<br />

RD<br />

∗ Contacts 1, 4 <strong>and</strong> 6 must not be wired on the 9-contact connector of the V2 machine processor.<br />

RTS<br />

CTS<br />

DTR<br />

DSR<br />

DCD<br />

Solder side<br />

13<br />

1<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

Wiring of the machine panel connector risks interfering with installation of the key labels.<br />

It is therefore recommended to install the labels (see 4.3.4) before wiring the connector.<br />

Cables<br />

25<br />

14<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 13<br />

7


7.1.8.2 RS 422 or RS 485 Line Relay Cable Connected to Machine Panel<br />

9<br />

6<br />

Solder side<br />

5<br />

1<br />

9 contacts<br />

15<br />

9<br />

7 - 14 en-938816/4<br />

8<br />

1<br />

15 contacts<br />

T(A) +<br />

T(B) -<br />

R(A) +<br />

R(B) -<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

Sub.D<br />

9 contacts<br />

9<br />

4<br />

6<br />

1<br />

Sub.D<br />

15 contacts<br />

2<br />

9<br />

4<br />

11<br />

0 V 5 7<br />

CONNECTOR<br />

SHELL<br />

1 2 3 4<br />

24 VDC<br />

1 - Male Sub.D connector:<br />

- 15 contacts on IT/serial line card<br />

- 9 contacts on V2 machine processor <strong>and</strong> UC SII CPU<br />

2 - Shielded cable with 2 twisted pairs <strong>and</strong> 1 isolated conductor<br />

(minimum wire size 0.14 m 2 )<br />

3 - 2-wire cable (optional, for power supply of the NUM diskette drive)<br />

4 - Remote 25-contact female Sub.D connector<br />

24 VDC<br />

12<br />

13<br />

10<br />

11<br />

7<br />

24<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

T(A) +<br />

T(B) -<br />

R(A) +<br />

R(B) -<br />

0 V<br />

24 VDC<br />

Solder side<br />

13<br />

1<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

Wiring of the machine panel connector risks interfering with installation of the key labels.<br />

It is therefore recommended to install the labels (see 4.3.4) before wiring the connector.<br />

25<br />

14


7.1.9 RS 232 Serial Interface Cable for NUM Diskette Drive<br />

9<br />

6<br />

5<br />

1<br />

9 contacts<br />

Solder side<br />

15<br />

9<br />

8<br />

1<br />

15 contacts<br />

TD<br />

25<br />

14<br />

0 V 5<br />

24 VDC ∗ 9<br />

RD<br />

RTS<br />

CTS<br />

DSR<br />

DCD<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

Sub.D<br />

9 contacts<br />

3<br />

2<br />

7<br />

8<br />

6 #<br />

1 #<br />

13<br />

1<br />

25 contacts<br />

Sub.D<br />

15 contacts<br />

1<br />

7<br />

3<br />

12<br />

5<br />

6<br />

13<br />

1 2 3<br />

25<br />

14<br />

Cables<br />

Solder side<br />

13<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 15<br />

1<br />

25 contacts<br />

1 - Male Sub.D connector:<br />

- 25 contacts on machine processor, <strong>CN</strong>C processor <strong>and</strong> UC SII CPU or<br />

remote on machine panel<br />

- 15 contacts on IT/serial line card<br />

- 9 contacts on V2 machine processor <strong>and</strong> UC SII CPU or remote on<br />

compact panel<br />

2 - Shielded cable with 3 twisted pairs <strong>and</strong> 4 isolated conductors<br />

(minimum wire size 0.14 mm 2 )<br />

3 - 25-contact female Sub.D connector on NUM drive side<br />

Sub.D<br />

25 contacts<br />

2<br />

7<br />

24<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

8<br />

CONNECTOR<br />

SHELL<br />

2<br />

7<br />

24<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

8<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

RD<br />

0 V<br />

24 VDC<br />

TD<br />

CTS<br />

RTS<br />

DTR<br />

DCD<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

∗ Connection with twisted pair used only when the remote connector provides the 24 VDC power supply for the NUM<br />

diskette drive.<br />

# Contacts 1 <strong>and</strong> 6 are not wired on the V2 machine processor 9-contact connector.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

7


7.1.10 RS 422 Serial Interface Cable for NUM Diskette Drive<br />

9<br />

6<br />

5<br />

1<br />

9 contacts<br />

Solder side<br />

15<br />

25<br />

7 - 16 en-938816/4<br />

9<br />

8<br />

1<br />

15 contacts<br />

T(A) +<br />

T(B) -<br />

R(A) +<br />

R(B) -<br />

0 V<br />

24 VDC ∗<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

14<br />

13<br />

1<br />

25 contacts<br />

Sub.D<br />

9 contacts<br />

9<br />

4<br />

6<br />

1<br />

5<br />

7<br />

Sub.D<br />

15 contacts<br />

2<br />

9<br />

4<br />

11<br />

7<br />

1 2 3<br />

1 - Male Sub.D connector:<br />

- 25 contacts remote on machine panel<br />

- 15 contacts on IT/serial line card<br />

- 9 contacts on V2 machine processor or remote on compact panel<br />

2 - Shielded cable with 3 twisted pairs (minimum wire size 0.14 mm 2 )<br />

3 - 25-contact female Sub.D connector on NUM drive side<br />

Sub.D<br />

25 contacts<br />

12<br />

13<br />

10<br />

11<br />

7<br />

24<br />

CONNECTOR<br />

SHELL<br />

4<br />

5<br />

12<br />

13<br />

10<br />

11<br />

7<br />

24<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

R(A) +<br />

R(B) -<br />

T(A) +<br />

T(B) -<br />

0 V<br />

24 VDC<br />

Solder side<br />

25<br />

14<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

13<br />

1<br />

25 contacts<br />

∗ Connection with twisted pair used only when the remote connector provides the 24 VDC power supply for the NUM<br />

diskette drive.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.


7.2 Axis Cables<br />

7.2.1 Axis Encoder Cable - Power Supply Provided by the Card<br />

7.2.1.1 Incremental Axis Encoder Cable Connected to the Axis Card, Power Supply Provided by<br />

the Card<br />

25<br />

14<br />

Solder side<br />

13<br />

1<br />

1 2<br />

4 5<br />

3<br />

Incremental<br />

sensor or<br />

EXE, IVB<br />

unit<br />

To<br />

servo-drive<br />

To switch <strong>and</strong><br />

24 V power supply<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

1 - 25-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Shielded cable [4 x (2 x 0.14 mm2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm2 ]<br />

3 - Connector<br />

4 - Twisted pair cable with double shielding (2 x 0.22 mm2 )<br />

5 - Shielded twisted pair cable (2 x 0.22 mm2 )<br />

When the wire size is not suitable for installing the wires in the Sub.D connector, the cable can be made using the<br />

alternate arrangement described in Sec. 7.2.10.1.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

fr-938816/4 7 - 17<br />

7


CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL Z<br />

CHANNEL Z<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

CHANNEL S<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH SPEED REF<br />

PFD SPEED REF<br />

SWITCH + Y<br />

SWITCH 0 V<br />

7 - 18 en-938816/5<br />

6<br />

5<br />

10<br />

9<br />

19<br />

18<br />

22<br />

21<br />

7<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

16<br />

15<br />

3<br />

2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

Screen not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

Physical address of the axis: contacts 11, 12, 13, 23, 24 <strong>and</strong> 25<br />

A<br />

A<br />

B<br />

B<br />

Z<br />

Z<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

0 V RETURN<br />

S<br />

5 V RETURN<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH DRIVE<br />

PFD DRIVE<br />

+ Switch contact<br />

- 24 V RETURN<br />

24 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

The physical address of the axis is obtained by the wiring of contacts 11, 12, 13, 23, 24 <strong>and</strong> 25 (see 7.2.10.2).<br />

The wiring of channels A, B, A, B <strong>and</strong> S allows detection of a wiring or encoder fault. This requires enabling the poor<br />

signal <strong>and</strong>/or encoder channel complementarity check (parameters P25 <strong>and</strong> P26 - refer to the Parameter Manual).<br />

REMARKS If the interference level is low, the cable with double shielding (servo-drive cable)<br />

can be replaced by a cable with single shielding connected at both ends to the<br />

protective earth.<br />

Contact S is present on sensors with poor signal errors. When the sensor does<br />

not include this signal, contact 7 on the <strong>CN</strong>C side must be connected to the sensor<br />

5 V return (5V sensors only).


7.2.1.2 Incremental Axis Encoder Cable Connected to an Axis Interface Module<br />

1<br />

5<br />

4<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

AXE<br />

N<br />

To axis connector (cable length 1.5 m)<br />

Incremental<br />

sensor or<br />

EXE, IVB<br />

unit<br />

To<br />

servo-drive<br />

To switch <strong>and</strong><br />

24 V power supply<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

External<br />

power supply<br />

1 - Axis interface module<br />

2 - 1 twisted pair shielded cable (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

3 - 1 twisted pair cable with double shielding (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

4 - Connector<br />

5 - Shielded cable [4 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

2<br />

3<br />

Cables<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 19<br />

7


CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL Z<br />

CHANNEL Z<br />

Power supply<br />

0 V<br />

CHANNEL S<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH SPEED REF<br />

PFD SPEED REF<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

SWITCH + Y<br />

SWITCH 0 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

SPEED REF. ENCODER<br />

HOME SWITCH<br />

7 - 20 en-938816/5<br />

A +<br />

A -<br />

B +<br />

B -<br />

Z.DATA +<br />

Z.DATA -<br />

ENCODER<br />

P.S<br />

0 V<br />

S -<br />

SPEED +<br />

SPEED -<br />

SW.IN<br />

SW.OUT<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

Screen not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

A<br />

A<br />

B<br />

B<br />

Z<br />

Z<br />

Encoder power<br />

supply<br />

0 V<br />

0 V RETURN<br />

S<br />

5 V RETURN<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH DRIVE<br />

PFD DRIVE<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

+ Switch contact<br />

-<br />

24 V RETURN<br />

24 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

The physical address of the axis is obtained by switches (see 7.2.7).<br />

The wiring of channels A, B, A, B <strong>and</strong> S allows detection of a wiring or encoder fault. This requires enabling the poor<br />

signal <strong>and</strong>/or encoder channel complementarity check (parameters P25 <strong>and</strong> P26 - refer to the Parameter Manual).<br />

REMARKS If the interference level is low, the cable with double shielding (servo-drive cable)<br />

can be replaced by a cable with single shielding connected at both ends to the<br />

protective earth.<br />

Contact S is present on sensors with poor signal errors. When the sensor does<br />

not include this signal, contact 7 on the <strong>CN</strong>C side must be connected to the sensor<br />

5 V return (5V sensors only).


7.2.2 Absolute SSI Axis Encoder Cable<br />

Cables<br />

7.2.2.1 Absolute SSI Axis Encoder Cable Connected to the Axis Card, Power Supply Provided by<br />

the Card<br />

Solder side<br />

25<br />

14<br />

13<br />

1<br />

1 2 3<br />

4<br />

1 - 25-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Shielded cable [3 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

or [4 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

3 - Connector<br />

4 - 1 twisted pair cable with double shielding (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

SSI<br />

encoder<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

To<br />

servo-drive<br />

When the wire size is not suitable for installing the wires in the Sub.D connector, the cable can be made using the<br />

alternate arrangement described in Sec. 7.2.10.1.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 21<br />

7


CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

CHANNEL S<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH SPEED REF<br />

PFD SPEED REF<br />

7 - 22 en-938816/5<br />

6<br />

5<br />

10<br />

9<br />

17<br />

4<br />

1<br />

14<br />

19<br />

18<br />

22<br />

21<br />

7<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

16<br />

15<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

Screen not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

Physical address of the axis: contacts 11, 12, 13, 23, 24 <strong>and</strong> 25<br />

CLK<br />

CLK<br />

DATA<br />

DATA<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

0 V RETURN<br />

5 V RETURN<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH DRIVE<br />

PFD DRIVE<br />

The physical address of the axis is obtained by the wiring of contacts 11, 12, 13, 23, 24 <strong>and</strong> 25 (see 7.2.10.2).<br />

The wiring of channels A, B, A, B <strong>and</strong> S allows detection of a wiring or encoder fault. This requires enabling the poor<br />

signal <strong>and</strong>/or encoder channel complementarity check (parameters P25 <strong>and</strong> P26 - refer to the Parameter Manual).<br />

REMARKS If the interference level is low, the cable with double shielding (servo-drive cable)<br />

can be replaced by a cable with single shielding connected at both ends to the<br />

protective earth.<br />

Depending on the frequency <strong>and</strong> the cable length, the connection of RCLK to<br />

ECLK is made on the axis connector or on the encoder (see 6.5.2.4).


7.2.2.2 Absolute SSI Axis Encoder Cable Connected to an Axis Interface Module<br />

1<br />

4<br />

3<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

AXE<br />

N<br />

To axis connector (cable length 1.5 m)<br />

SSI<br />

encoder<br />

To<br />

servo-drive<br />

External<br />

power supply<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

1 - Axis interface module<br />

2 - 1 twisted pair cable with double shielding (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

3 - Connector<br />

4 - Shielded cable [3 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

or [4 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

2<br />

Cables<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 23<br />

7


CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

Power supply<br />

0 V<br />

ENCODER<br />

7 - 24 en-938816/5<br />

A +<br />

A -<br />

B +<br />

B -<br />

RCLK +<br />

RCLK -<br />

ECLK +<br />

ECLK -<br />

Z.DATA +<br />

Z.DATA -<br />

ENCODER<br />

P.S<br />

0 V<br />

CLK<br />

CLK<br />

DATA<br />

DATA<br />

Encoder power<br />

supply<br />

0 V<br />

0 V RETURN ∗<br />

CHANNEL S S -<br />

5 V RETURN ∗<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH SPEED REF<br />

PFD SPEED REF<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

SPEED REF.<br />

SPEED +<br />

SPEED -<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

Screen not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH DRIVE<br />

PFD DRIVE<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

∗ 5 V encoders only.<br />

The physical address of the axis is obtained by switches (see 7.2.7).<br />

The wiring of channels A, B, A, B <strong>and</strong> S allows detection of a wiring or encoder fault. This requires enabling the poor<br />

signal <strong>and</strong>/or encoder channel complementarity check (parameters P25 <strong>and</strong> P26 - refer to the Parameter Manual).<br />

REMARKS If the interference level is low, the cable with double shielding (servo-drive cable)<br />

can be replaced by a cable with single shielding connected at both ends to the<br />

protective earth.<br />

Depending on the frequency <strong>and</strong> the cable length, the connection of RCLK to<br />

ECLK is made on the axis connector or on the encoder (see 6.5.2.4).


7.2.3 Semiabsolute SSI Axis Encoder Cable<br />

Cables<br />

7.2.3.1 Semiabsolute SSI Axis Encoder Cable Connected to the Axis Card, Power Supply Provided<br />

by the Card<br />

Solder side<br />

25<br />

14<br />

13<br />

1<br />

1 2 3<br />

4 5<br />

SSI axis<br />

encoder<br />

To<br />

servo-drive<br />

To switch <strong>and</strong><br />

24 V power supply<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

1 - 25-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Shielded cable [3 x (2 x 0.14 mm2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm2 ]<br />

or [4 x (2 x 0.14 mm2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm2 ]<br />

3 - Connector<br />

4 - 1 twisted pair cable with double shielding (2 x 0.22 mm2 )<br />

5 - 1 twisted pair shielded cable (2 x 0.22 mm2 )<br />

When the wire size is not suitable for installing the wires in the Sub.D connector, the cable can be made using the<br />

alternate arrangement described in Sec. 7.2.10.1.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 25<br />

7


CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

CHANNEL S<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH SPEED REF<br />

PFD SPEED REF<br />

SWITCH + Y<br />

SWITCH 0 V<br />

7 - 26 en-938816/5<br />

6<br />

5<br />

10<br />

9<br />

17<br />

4<br />

1<br />

14<br />

19<br />

18<br />

22<br />

21<br />

7<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

16<br />

15<br />

3<br />

2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

Screen not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

Physical address of the axis: contacts 11, 12, 13, 23, 24 <strong>and</strong> 25<br />

CLK<br />

CLK<br />

DATA<br />

DATA<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

0 V RETURN<br />

5 V RETURN<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH DRIVE<br />

PFD DRIVE<br />

+ Switch contact<br />

- 24 V RETURN<br />

24 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

The physical address of the axis is obtained by the wiring of contacts 11, 12, 13, 23, 24 <strong>and</strong> 25 (see 7.2.10.2).<br />

The wiring of channels A, B, A, B <strong>and</strong> S allows detection of a wiring or encoder fault. This requires enabling the poor<br />

signal <strong>and</strong>/or encoder channel complementarity check (parameters P25 <strong>and</strong> P26 - refer to the Parameter Manual).<br />

REMARKS If the interference level is low, the cable with double shielding (servo-drive cable)<br />

can be replaced by a cable with single shielding connected at both ends to the<br />

protective earth.<br />

Depending on the frequency <strong>and</strong> the cable length, the connection of RCLK to<br />

ECLK is made on the axis connector or on the encoder (see 6.5.2.4).


7.2.3.2 Semiabsolute SSI Axis Encoder Connected to an Axis Interface Module<br />

1<br />

5<br />

4<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

AXE<br />

N<br />

To axis connector (cable length 1.5 m)<br />

SSI axis<br />

encoder<br />

To<br />

servo-drive<br />

External<br />

power supply<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

To switch <strong>and</strong><br />

24 V power supply<br />

1 - Axis interface module<br />

2 - 1 twisted pair shielded cable (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

3 - 1 twisted pair cable with double shielding (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

4 - Connector<br />

5 - Shielded cable [3 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

or [4 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

2<br />

3<br />

Cables<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 27<br />

7


CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

Power supply<br />

0 V<br />

ENCODER<br />

7 - 28 en-938816/5<br />

A +<br />

A -<br />

B +<br />

B -<br />

RCLK +<br />

RCLK -<br />

ECLK +<br />

ECLK -<br />

Z.DATA +<br />

Z.DATA -<br />

ENCODER<br />

P.S<br />

0 V<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

CLK<br />

CLK<br />

DATA<br />

DATA<br />

Encoder power<br />

supply<br />

0 V<br />

0 V RETURN ∗<br />

CHANNEL S S -<br />

5 V RETURN ∗<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH SPEED REF<br />

PFD SPEED REF<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

SWITCH + Y<br />

SWITCH 0 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

SPEED REF.<br />

HOME SWITCH<br />

SPEED +<br />

SPEED -<br />

SW.IN<br />

SW.OUT<br />

Screen not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH DRIVE<br />

PFD DRIVE<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

+ Switch contact<br />

-<br />

24 V RETURN<br />

24 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

∗ 5 V encoders only.<br />

The physical address of the axis is obtained by switches (see 7.2.7).<br />

The wiring of channels A, B, A, B <strong>and</strong> S allows detection of a wiring or encoder fault. This requires enabling the poor<br />

signal <strong>and</strong>/or encoder channel complementarity check (parameters P25 <strong>and</strong> P26 - refer to the Parameter Manual).<br />

REMARKS If the interference level is low, the cable with double shielding (servo-drive cable)<br />

can be replaced by a cable with single shielding connected at both ends to the<br />

protective earth.<br />

Depending on the frequency <strong>and</strong> the cable length, the connection of RCLK to<br />

ECLK is made on the axis connector or on the encoder (see 6.5.2.4).


7.2.4 Combined Axis Encoder Cable: SSI + Incremental - Sinusoidal Pulses<br />

7.2.4.1 Combined Axis Encoder Cable: SSI + Incremental - Sinusoidal Pulses - Connected to the<br />

Axis Card, Power Supply Provided by the Card<br />

Solder side<br />

25<br />

14<br />

13<br />

1<br />

1 2 3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6 7<br />

To switch <strong>and</strong><br />

24 V power supply<br />

1 - 25-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Shielded cable [2 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

3 - Interpolation <strong>and</strong> shaping unit with associated cable<br />

4 - Connector<br />

5 - Shielded cable [3 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

or [4 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

6 - 1 twisted pair cable with double shielding (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

7 - 1 twisted pair shielded cable (2 x 0.22 mm 2 ) ∗<br />

Combined<br />

encoder<br />

Cables<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

To<br />

servo-drive<br />

∗ The switch <strong>and</strong> cable (7) are only used with semiabsolute axis encoders.<br />

When the wire size is not suitable for installing the wires in the Sub.D connector, the cable can be made using the<br />

alternate arrangement described in Sec. 7.2.10.1.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 29<br />

7


CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

CHANNEL S<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH SPEED REF<br />

PFD SPEED REF<br />

SWITCH + Y<br />

SWITCH 0 V<br />

7 - 30 en-938816/5<br />

6<br />

5<br />

10<br />

9<br />

22<br />

21<br />

7<br />

17<br />

4<br />

1<br />

14<br />

19<br />

18<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

16<br />

15<br />

3<br />

2<br />

0.5<br />

0.5<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

Ua+<br />

Ua-<br />

Ub+<br />

Ub-<br />

5 V<br />

0 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

Screen not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

Wiring of the switch only with<br />

semiabsolute axis encoder<br />

Physical address of the axis: contacts 11, 12, 13, 23, 24 <strong>and</strong> 25<br />

A+<br />

A-<br />

B+<br />

B-<br />

0 V<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

0 V RETURN<br />

5 V RETURN<br />

CLK<br />

CLK<br />

DATA<br />

DATA<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH DRIVE<br />

PFD DRIVE<br />

+ Switch contact<br />

- 24 V RETURN<br />

24 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

The physical address of the axis is obtained by the wiring of contacts 11, 12, 13, 23, 24 <strong>and</strong> 25 (see 7.2.10.2).<br />

The wiring of channels A, B, A, B <strong>and</strong> S allows detection of a wiring or encoder fault. This requires enabling the poor<br />

signal <strong>and</strong>/or encoder channel complementarity check (parameters P25 <strong>and</strong> P26 - refer to the Parameter Manual).<br />

REMARKS If the interference level is low, the cable with double shielding (servo-drive cable)<br />

can be replaced by a cable with single shielding connected at both ends to the<br />

protective earth.<br />

Depending on the frequency <strong>and</strong> the cable length, the connection of RCLK to<br />

ECLK is made on the axis connector or on the encoder (see 6.5.2.4).


7.2.4.2 Combined Axis Encoder Cable: SSI + Incremental - Sinusoidal Pulses - Connected to an<br />

Axis Interface Module<br />

1<br />

7<br />

6<br />

5<br />

4<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

AXE<br />

N<br />

To axis connector (cable length 1.5 m)<br />

Combined<br />

encoder<br />

To<br />

servo-drive<br />

External<br />

power supply<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

To switch <strong>and</strong><br />

24 V power supply<br />

1 - Axis interface module<br />

2 - 1 twisted pair shielded cable (2 x 0.22 mm 2 ) ∗<br />

3 - 1 twisted pair cable with double shielding (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

4 - Connector<br />

5 - Shielded cable [3 x (2 x 0.14 mm2) + 2 x 0.5 mm2]<br />

or [4 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

6 - Interpolation <strong>and</strong> shaping unit with associated cable<br />

7 - Shielded cable [2 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

∗ The switch <strong>and</strong> cable (2) are only used with semiabsolute axis encoders.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

2<br />

3<br />

Cables<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 31<br />

7


CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

Power supply<br />

0 V<br />

CHANNEL S<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH SPEED REF<br />

PFD SPEED REF<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

SWITCH + Y<br />

SWITCH 0 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

ENCODER<br />

SPEED REF.<br />

HOME SWITCH<br />

7 - 32 en-938816/5<br />

A +<br />

A -<br />

B +<br />

B -<br />

ENCODER<br />

P.S<br />

0 V<br />

S -<br />

RCLK +<br />

RCLK -<br />

ECLK +<br />

ECLK -<br />

Z.DATA +<br />

Z.DATA -<br />

SPEED +<br />

SPEED -<br />

SW.IN<br />

SW.OUT<br />

0.5<br />

0.5<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

Ua+<br />

Ua-<br />

Ub+<br />

Ub-<br />

Power supply<br />

0 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

Screen not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

Wiring of the switch only with<br />

semiabsolute axis encoder<br />

+<br />

-<br />

24 V<br />

A+<br />

A-<br />

B+<br />

B-<br />

0 V<br />

Encoder power<br />

supply<br />

0 V<br />

0 V RETURN ∗<br />

5 V RETURN ∗<br />

CLK<br />

CLK<br />

DATA<br />

DATA<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH DRIVE<br />

PFD DRIVE<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

Switch contact<br />

24 V RETURN<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

∗ 5 V encoders only.<br />

The physical address of the axis is obtained by switches (see 7.2.7).<br />

The wiring of channels A, B, A, B <strong>and</strong> S allows detection of a wiring or encoder fault. This requires enabling the poor<br />

signal <strong>and</strong>/or encoder channel complementarity check (parameters P25 <strong>and</strong> P26 - refer to the Parameter Manual).<br />

REMARKS If the interference level is low, the cable with double shielding (servo-drive cable)<br />

can be replaced by a cable with single shielding connected at both ends to the<br />

protective earth.<br />

Depending on the frequency <strong>and</strong> the cable length, the connection of RCLK to<br />

ECLK is made on the axis connector or on the encoder (see 6.5.2.4).


7.2.5 Combined Axis Encoder Cable: SSI + Incremental - Square Pulses<br />

Cables<br />

7.2.5.1 Combined Axis Encoder Cable: SSI + Incremental - Square Pulses - Connected to the Axis<br />

Card, Power Supply Provided by the Card<br />

Solder side<br />

25<br />

14<br />

13<br />

1<br />

1<br />

4 5<br />

2<br />

3<br />

To switch <strong>and</strong><br />

24 V power supply<br />

1 - 25-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Shielded cable [5 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

or [6 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

3 - Connector<br />

4 - 1 twisted pair cable with double shielding (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

5 - 1 twisted pair shielded cable (2 x 0.22 mm 2 ) ∗<br />

Combined<br />

encoder<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

To<br />

servo-drive<br />

∗ The switch <strong>and</strong> cable (5) are only used with semiabsolute axis encoders.<br />

When the wire size is not suitable for installing the wires in the Sub.D connector, the cable can be made using the<br />

alternate arrangement described in Sec. 7.2.10.1.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 33<br />

7


CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

CHANNEL S<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH SPEED REF<br />

PFD SPEED REF<br />

SWITCH + Y<br />

SWITCH 0 V<br />

7 - 34 en-938816/5<br />

6<br />

5<br />

10<br />

9<br />

22<br />

21<br />

7<br />

17<br />

4<br />

1<br />

14<br />

19<br />

18<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

16<br />

15<br />

3<br />

2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

Screen not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

Wiring of the switch only with<br />

semiabsolute axis encoder<br />

Physical address of the axis: contacts 11, 12, 13, 23, 24 <strong>and</strong> 25<br />

+<br />

-<br />

24 V<br />

A+<br />

A-<br />

B+<br />

B-<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

0 V RETURN<br />

5 V RETURN<br />

CLK<br />

CLK<br />

DATA<br />

DATA<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH DRIVE<br />

PFD DRIVE<br />

Switch contact<br />

24 V RETURN<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

The physical address of the axis is obtained by the wiring of contacts 11, 12, 13, 23, 24 <strong>and</strong> 25 (see 7.2.10.2).<br />

The wiring of channels A, B, A, B <strong>and</strong> S allows detection of a wiring or encoder fault. This requires enabling the poor<br />

signal <strong>and</strong>/or encoder channel complementarity check (parameters P25 <strong>and</strong> P26 - refer to the Parameter Manual).<br />

REMARKS If the interference level is low, the cable with double shielding (servo-drive cable)<br />

can be replaced by a cable with single shielding connected at both ends to the<br />

protective earth.<br />

Depending on the frequency <strong>and</strong> the cable length, the connection of RCLK to<br />

ECLK is made on the axis connector or on the encoder (see 6.5.2.4).


Cables<br />

7.2.5.2 Combined Axis Encoder Cable : SSI + Incremental - Square Pulses - Connected to an Axis<br />

Interface Module<br />

1<br />

5<br />

4<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

AXE<br />

N<br />

To axis connector (cable length 1.5 m)<br />

Combined<br />

encoder<br />

To<br />

servo-drive<br />

To switch <strong>and</strong><br />

24 V power supply<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

External<br />

power supply<br />

1 - Axis interface module<br />

2 - 1 twisted pair shielded cable (2 x 0.22 mm 2 ) ∗<br />

3 - 1 twisted pair cable with double shielding (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

4 - Connector<br />

5 - Shielded cable [5 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

or [6 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 ]<br />

∗ The switch <strong>and</strong> cable (2) are only used with semiabsolute axis encoders.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

2<br />

3<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 35<br />

7


CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

Power supply<br />

0 V<br />

CHANNEL S<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL RCLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

CHANNEL ECLK<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

DATA CHANNEL<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH SPEED REF<br />

PFD SPEED REF<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

SWITCH + Y<br />

SWITCH 0 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

SPEED REF. ENCODER<br />

HOME SWITCH<br />

7 - 36 en-938816/5<br />

A +<br />

A -<br />

B +<br />

B -<br />

ENCODER<br />

P.S<br />

0 V<br />

S -<br />

RCLK +<br />

RCLK -<br />

ECLK +<br />

ECLK -<br />

Z.DATA +<br />

Z.DATA -<br />

SPEED +<br />

SPEED -<br />

SW.IN<br />

SW.OUT<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

Screen not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

Wiring of the switch only with<br />

semiabsolute axis encoder<br />

+<br />

-<br />

24 V<br />

A+<br />

A-<br />

B+<br />

B-<br />

Encoder power<br />

supply<br />

0 V<br />

0 V RETURN ∗<br />

5 V RETURN ∗<br />

CLK<br />

CLK<br />

DATA<br />

DATA<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

PCH DRIVE<br />

PFD DRIVE<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

Switch contact<br />

24 V RETURN<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

∗ 5 V encoders only.<br />

The physical address of the axis is obtained by switches (see 7.2.7).<br />

The wiring of channels A, B, A, B <strong>and</strong> S allows detection of a wiring or encoder fault. This requires enabling the poor<br />

signal <strong>and</strong>/or encoder channel complementarity check (parameters P25 <strong>and</strong> P26 - refer to the Parameter Manual).<br />

REMARKS If the interference level is low, the cable with double shielding (servo-drive cable)<br />

can be replaced by a cable with single shielding connected at both ends to the<br />

protective earth.<br />

Depending on the frequency <strong>and</strong> the cable length, the connection of RCLK to<br />

ECLK is made on the axis connector or on the encoder (see 6.5.2.4).


7.2.6 Axes With External Power Supply<br />

Cables<br />

When an external power supply is used (case of sensors > 5 V or 5 V sensors for which the axis interface cannot supply<br />

sufficient voltage because of the distance, for instance), the cables must be adapted to take this power supply into<br />

account. Only the differences from the cables for encoders supplied by the card are described below.<br />

25<br />

14<br />

Solder side<br />

13<br />

1<br />

1 2<br />

To external<br />

3<br />

power supply<br />

1 - 25-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Sensor cable<br />

3 - Connector<br />

The following wiring is different from that of a sensor supplied by the axis card:<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

CHANNEL S<br />

22<br />

21<br />

∗ On 5 V encoders only.<br />

7<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

External<br />

power supply<br />

+ Ref<br />

- Ref<br />

+<br />

-<br />

5 V RETURN ∗<br />

0 V RETURN ∗<br />

Sensor power<br />

supply<br />

0 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

REMARK This section does not concern axes wired via an axis interface module <strong>and</strong><br />

requiring an external power supply (see 7.2.7 <strong>and</strong> axis wiring).<br />

S<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 37<br />

7


7.2.7 Settings on an Axis Interface Module<br />

7 - 38 en-938816/5<br />

To axis connector (cable length 1.5 m)<br />

1 2 3<br />

700/800 1000<br />

AXIS<br />

N<br />

ANALOG.AXIS<br />

263900000<br />

1 2<br />

0 1<br />

INT.5V<br />

ADDRESS<br />

ENCODER<br />

!<br />

POWER SUPPLY<br />

EXT.<br />

POWER<br />

SUPPLY ON<br />

700/800 1000<br />

To sensor, servo-drive <strong>and</strong><br />

switch (see wiring diagrams)<br />

Write the axis number here<br />

SPINDLE 2<br />

SPINDLE 1<br />

HANDWHEEL<br />

ENCODER SPEED REF. HOME SWITCH<br />

HOME SW<br />

SPINDLE<br />

SPINDLE<br />

SPINDLE<br />

SPINDLE<br />

HWHEEL<br />

HWHEEL<br />

HWHEEL<br />

HWHEEL<br />

EXT.SUPPLY<br />

External<br />

power supply<br />

Protective<br />

earth<br />

Selecting the System (1)<br />

The NUM <strong>1060</strong> Series I <strong>and</strong> Series II <strong>CN</strong>Cs are part of the 1000 range. The switch must therefore be set as follows:<br />

Selecting the Power Supply (2)<br />

700/800 1000<br />

5 VDC Power Supply<br />

The choice of supplying a 5 VDC encoder by the axis card or by an external power supply depends on the encoder<br />

current draw:<br />

Encoder current draw Power supply Switch setting<br />

≤ 250 mA Internal<br />

> 250 mA External (0.5 to 2.5 mm 2 wires)<br />

The selection of an internal or external power supply also depends on the distance to the encoder (see 6.5.2.1).<br />

1 2<br />

1 2<br />

INT.5V<br />

!<br />

EXT.<br />

INT.5V<br />

!<br />

EXT.


Cables<br />

Power Supply Above 5 VDC<br />

Since the axis card cannot supply a voltage above 5 VDC, the supply must be external in this case (0.5 to 2.5 mm2 wires). The switch must therefore be set as follows:<br />

1 2<br />

INT.5V<br />

Setting the Physical Address of the Axis (3)<br />

The physical address of the axis is set on 5 switches using the code given in the address table below:<br />

0 1<br />

ADDRESS<br />

!<br />

EXT.<br />

Switches Address table<br />

00000000 000000001111111111111111 00000000111111110000000011111111 00001111000011110000111100001111<br />

00110011001100110011001100110011<br />

01010101010101010101010101010101<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

15<br />

16<br />

17<br />

18<br />

19<br />

20<br />

21<br />

22<br />

23<br />

24<br />

25<br />

26<br />

27<br />

28<br />

29<br />

30<br />

31<br />

For instance, the following switch setting corresponds to address 10:<br />

0 1<br />

REMARKS Two axes cannot have the same address. The system ignores axes with identical<br />

addresses.<br />

The addresses assigned to the PLC axes must be the highest addresses.<br />

Physical addresses 24 to 27 are reserved for spindles 1 to 4.<br />

Physical addresses 28 to 31 are reserved for h<strong>and</strong>wheels 1 to 4.<br />

0<br />

1<br />

0<br />

1<br />

0<br />

10<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 39<br />

7


7.2.8 H<strong>and</strong>wheel Cables with Nondifferential Outputs<br />

Solder side<br />

25<br />

14<br />

13<br />

1<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL S<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

+ 2 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

6<br />

5<br />

10<br />

9<br />

7<br />

22<br />

21<br />

8<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

7 - 40 en-938816/4<br />

1 2 3<br />

1 - 25-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Shielded cable with 3 twisted pairs surrounding one pair<br />

[3 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 )]<br />

3 - H<strong>and</strong>wheel with nondifferential outputs<br />

Physical address of the h<strong>and</strong>weel: contacts 11, 12 <strong>and</strong> 24<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

0.5 mm 2<br />

Rear view<br />

5V 0V A B<br />

A<br />

B<br />

5 V<br />

0 V<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

The physical address of the h<strong>and</strong>wheel is determined by the wiring of contacts 11, 12 <strong>and</strong> 24 (see 7.2.10.2).<br />

REMARK Physical addresses 28 to 31 are reserved for h<strong>and</strong>wheels 1 to 4.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.


7.2.9 H<strong>and</strong>wheel Cable with Differential Outputs<br />

Solder side<br />

25<br />

14<br />

13<br />

1<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL A<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL B<br />

CHANNEL S<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

+ 2 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

6<br />

5<br />

10<br />

9<br />

7<br />

22<br />

21<br />

8<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

1 2 3<br />

1 - 25-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Shielded cable with 3 twisted pairs surrounding one pair<br />

[3 x (2 x 0.14 mm 2 ) + 2 x 0.5 mm 2 )]<br />

3 - H<strong>and</strong>wheel with nondifferential outputs<br />

Physical address of the h<strong>and</strong>weel: contacts 11, 12 <strong>and</strong> 24<br />

0.5 mm2 0.5 mm2 Rear view<br />

5V 0V A A' B B'<br />

A CHANNEL A<br />

A CHANNEL A<br />

B CHANNEL B<br />

B CHANNEL B<br />

5 V<br />

0 V<br />

+ 5 V<br />

0 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

The physical address of the h<strong>and</strong>wheel is determined by the wiring of contacts 11, 12 <strong>and</strong> 24 (see 7.2.10.2).<br />

REMARK Physical addresses 28 to 31 are reserved for h<strong>and</strong>wheels 1 to 4.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

Cables<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 41<br />

7


7.2.10 General Information on Axis Cables<br />

7.2.10.1 Alternate Wiring With Power Supply Provided by the Card<br />

When the power supply wire size is not suitable for installing the wires in the Sub.D connector, the wiring can be carried<br />

out as follows:<br />

Sub.D connector<br />

Axis encoder card<br />

7 - 42 en-938816/4<br />

Directly connected components<br />

Small size lead<br />

as short as possible<br />

(a few cm)<br />

Power supply wires:<br />

shielded cable with<br />

2 large twisted wires<br />

7.2.10.2 Physical Addresses of the Axes<br />

Each axis must have an address in order to be recognised by the system.<br />

The physical address of an axis is determined by the wiring of pins 11, 12, 13, 23, 24 <strong>and</strong> 25.<br />

View of solder side<br />

Pin 25 (weight 4)<br />

Pin 24 (weight 2)<br />

Pin 23 (weight 16)<br />

Pin 13 (weight 8)<br />

Pin 12 (address common)<br />

Pin 11 (weight 1)<br />

Encoder<br />

connector<br />

The physical address of an axis is given by the sum of the binary values of the remaining pins NOT shorted out to pin<br />

12: not connected = high level.<br />

REMARKS Two axes cannot have the same address. The system ignores axes with the same<br />

address.<br />

The addresses assigned to the PLC axes must be the highest addresses.<br />

Physical addresses 24 to 27 are reserved for spindles 1 to 4.<br />

Physical addresses 28 to 31 are reserved for h<strong>and</strong>wheels 1 to 4.


en-938816/4 7 - 43<br />

Cables<br />

7<br />

Wiring of the Axis Addresses<br />

0<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

1<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

2<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

3<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

4<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

5<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

6<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

7<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

8<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

9<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

10<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

11<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

12<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

13<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

15<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

16<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

17<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

18<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

19<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

20<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

21<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

22<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

23<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

24<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

25<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

26<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

27<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

28<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

29<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

30<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

31<br />

25<br />

24<br />

23<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13


7.3 Analogue I/O, Interrupt <strong>and</strong> Timer Cables<br />

7.3.1 Analogue I/O <strong>and</strong> Interrupt Cable for UC SII Processor<br />

Solder side<br />

5<br />

1<br />

7 - 44 en-938816/4<br />

9<br />

6<br />

1<br />

1 - 9-contact female Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Shielded 2-wire (2 x 0.22 mm2) cable<br />

3 - Interrupt <strong>and</strong> analogue output connector plugs<br />

4 - Cable for analogue inputs (see 7.3.8)<br />

2<br />

4<br />

3


∗ See 7.3.8<br />

INPUT ANA. BR<br />

AGND<br />

VCC 5 V<br />

INPUT ANA. AV<br />

IT 5 V<br />

IT 24 V<br />

COM IT<br />

S-A<br />

AGND<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

3<br />

7<br />

8<br />

4<br />

6<br />

1<br />

2<br />

5<br />

9<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

or<br />

For wiring of analogue inputs ∗<br />

Screen not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

IT Signal<br />

IT Common<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

Analogue output<br />

Analogue common<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

Cables<br />

REMARK If the interference level is low, the analogue output cable with double shielding can<br />

be replaced by a cable with single shielding connected at both ends to the<br />

protective earth.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

Inputs ANA BR (spindle speed) <strong>and</strong> ANA AV (feed rate) are 0/5 V type. The reference<br />

voltage supplied by the module (contact 8) is 5 V, <strong>and</strong> therefore corresponds to the full-scale<br />

value of the 8-bit ADC.<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 45<br />

7


7.3.2 Analogue I/O Cable for Version 2 Machine Processor<br />

∗ See 7.3.8<br />

INPUT ANA. 2<br />

INPUT ANA. 0<br />

ANA. GND<br />

EXT. REF. OUTPUT<br />

INPUT ANA. 3<br />

INPUT ANA. 1<br />

OUTPUT ANA. 1<br />

ANA. GND<br />

OUTPUT ANA. 0<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

7 - 46 en-938816/5<br />

Solder side<br />

8<br />

1<br />

7<br />

8<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

15<br />

4<br />

6<br />

5<br />

15<br />

9<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

1 2<br />

1 - 15-contact female Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Analogue input cable (see 7.3.8)<br />

3 - Two 1-pair cables with double shielding for analogue outputs<br />

(2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

For wiring of analogue inputs ∗<br />

3<br />

Screen not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

2 kΩ min.<br />

2 kΩ min.<br />

Protective earth<br />

REMARK If the interference level is low, the analogue output cable with double shielding can<br />

be replaced by a cable with single shielding connected at both ends to the<br />

protective earth.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.


7.3.3 Analogue I/O-Timer Cable for Version 1 Machine Processor<br />

Solder side<br />

8<br />

1<br />

15<br />

9<br />

1 2<br />

5 4<br />

1 - 15-contact female Sub.D connector plug 4 - Timer output cable (wire size 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

2 - Cables for analogue inputs (see 7.3.8) 5 - Two twisted-pair cables with double shielding<br />

3 - One shielded twisted-pair cable: (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

timer input (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

TIMER OUTPUT<br />

TIMER OUTPUT COMMON<br />

TIMER POWER SUPPLY<br />

INPUT ANA. 0<br />

ANA. GND<br />

EXTERNAL REF. OUTPUT<br />

∗ See 7.3.8<br />

INPUT ANA. 2<br />

INPUT ANA. 3<br />

INPUT ANA. 1<br />

OUTPUT ANA. 1<br />

ANA. GND<br />

OUTPUT ANA. 0<br />

TIMER INPUT<br />

COMMON<br />

TIMER INPUT<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

2<br />

9<br />

10<br />

7<br />

8<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

15<br />

4<br />

6<br />

5<br />

3<br />

11<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

Load<br />

For wiring analogue inputs ∗<br />

Screening not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

24 V<br />

2 kΩ min.<br />

2 kΩ min.<br />

24 V<br />

- +<br />

- +<br />

3<br />

Protective earth<br />

Cables<br />

REMARK If the interference level is low, the analogue output cable with double shielding can<br />

be replaced by a cable with single shielding connected at both ends to the<br />

protective earth.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 47<br />

7


7.3.4 Machine Processor Interrupt Input Cable<br />

Solder side<br />

15<br />

9<br />

7 - 48 en-938816/4<br />

8<br />

1<br />

INPUT 0 : 5 V<br />

INPUT 0 : 24 V<br />

COMMON 0<br />

INPUT 1 : 5 V<br />

INPUT 1 : 24 V<br />

COMMON 1<br />

INPUT 2 : 5 V<br />

INPUT 2 : 24 V<br />

COMMON 2<br />

INPUT 3 : 5 V<br />

INPUT 3 : 24 V<br />

COMMON 3<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

1<br />

2<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

6<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

1 2<br />

1 - 15-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Four shielded twisted pair cables (cross-sectional area 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

Protective earth<br />

Protective earth<br />

Protective earth<br />

Protective earth<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

24 V<br />

24 V<br />

24 V<br />

24 V<br />

5 V<br />

5 V<br />

5 V<br />

5 V


7.3.5 IT/Serial Line Card Interrupt Input Cable<br />

Solder side<br />

9<br />

6<br />

5<br />

1<br />

INPUT 0 : 5 V<br />

INPUT 0 : 24 V<br />

INPUT 1 : 5 V<br />

INPUT 1 : 24 V<br />

COMMON<br />

INPUT 2 : 5 V<br />

INPUT 2 : 24 V<br />

INPUT 3 : 5 V<br />

INPUT 3 : 24 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

1 2<br />

1 - 9-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Four shielded twisted pair cables (cross-sectional area 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

Protective earth<br />

Protective earth<br />

Protective earth<br />

Protective earth<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

24 V<br />

24 V<br />

24 V<br />

24 V<br />

Cables<br />

5 V<br />

5 V<br />

5 V<br />

5 V<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 49<br />

7


7.3.6 8 Analogue Input Cable<br />

Solder side<br />

13<br />

7 - 50 en-938816/4<br />

1<br />

25<br />

14<br />

1<br />

1 - 25-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - 8 shielded cables with 1 twisted pair (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

2


E1-<br />

E1+<br />

EARTH<br />

E2-<br />

E2+<br />

EARTH<br />

E3-<br />

E3+<br />

EARTH<br />

E4-<br />

E4+<br />

EARTH<br />

E5-<br />

E5+<br />

EARTH<br />

E6-<br />

E6+<br />

EARTH<br />

E7-<br />

E7+<br />

EARTH<br />

E8-<br />

E8+<br />

EARTH<br />

EARTH CONNECTED<br />

TO THE COVER<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

15<br />

16<br />

14<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

18<br />

19<br />

17<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

21<br />

22<br />

20<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

24<br />

25<br />

23<br />

13<br />

! CAUTION<br />

REFERENCE<br />

REFERENCE<br />

REFERENCE<br />

REFERENCE<br />

REFERENCE<br />

REFERENCE<br />

REFERENCE<br />

REFERENCE<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

Cables<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 51<br />

7


7.3.7 8 Analogue Output/Reference Voltage Cable<br />

Solder side<br />

25<br />

14<br />

13<br />

7 - 52 en-938816/4<br />

1<br />

1<br />

3<br />

1 - 25-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - 8 shielded cables with 1 twisted pair with double shielding (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

3 - 2 cables with 1 twisted pair (2 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

2


AGND<br />

SOR6<br />

AGND<br />

SOR5<br />

AGND<br />

SOR4<br />

AGND<br />

SOR3<br />

AGND<br />

SOR2<br />

AGND<br />

SOR1<br />

AGND<br />

SOR7<br />

AGND<br />

SOR8<br />

EARTH<br />

CONNECTED<br />

TO THE COVER<br />

AGND<br />

- 10 V<br />

AGND<br />

+ 10 V<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

15<br />

16<br />

17<br />

18<br />

20<br />

21<br />

22<br />

23<br />

24<br />

Screening not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

MAXIMUM<br />

LOAD 2 kΩ<br />

MAXIMUM<br />

LOAD 2 kΩ<br />

MAXIMUM<br />

LOAD 2 kΩ<br />

MAXIMUM<br />

LOAD 2 kΩ<br />

MAXIMUM<br />

LOAD 2 kΩ<br />

MAXIMUM<br />

LOAD 2 kΩ<br />

MAXIMUM<br />

LOAD 2 kΩ<br />

MAXIMUM<br />

LOAD 2 kΩ<br />

PROTECTIVE EARTH<br />

MAXIMUM<br />

LOAD 100 Ω<br />

MAXIMUM<br />

LOAD 100 Ω<br />

Cables<br />

REMARK If the interference level is low, the cables with double shielding can be replaced<br />

by cables with single shielding, with the shielding connected to the protective earth<br />

at both ends.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 53<br />

7


7.3.8 Wiring of the Analogue Inputs<br />

NUM recommends wiring each analogue input to a different cable (see 7.3.8.1), but this is not always possible due<br />

to a lack of space inside the connector cover. In this case, the second solution proposed consists of connecting all<br />

the inputs via the same cable (see 7.3.8.2).<br />

The wiring examples below are based on wiring two analogue inputs (feed rate <strong>and</strong> spindle potentiometers) but can<br />

also be extended to three or four inputs (on the machine processor ADC/DAC connector) applying the same wiring<br />

principles.<br />

7.3.8.1 Recommended Wiring of the Analogue Inputs<br />

INPUT ANA. X<br />

ANA. GND<br />

EXTERNAL REF.<br />

OUTPUT<br />

INPUT ANA. Y<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

7 - 54 en-938816/4<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

1 2<br />

1 - Two twisted 3-wire cables with double shielding (3 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

2 - Spindle speed <strong>and</strong> feed rate potentiometers<br />

Blue<br />

Red<br />

White<br />

White<br />

Red<br />

Blue<br />

Screening not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

Feed rate<br />

potentiometer<br />

1 kΩ<br />

1 kΩ<br />

Spindle<br />

potentiometer<br />

Protective earth<br />

REMARK If the interference level is low, the cables with double shielding can be replaced<br />

by cables with single shielding, with the shielding connected to the protective earth<br />

at both ends.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.


7.3.8.2 Alternative Analogue Input Wiring<br />

INPUT ANA. X<br />

ANA. GND<br />

EXTERNAL REF.<br />

OUTPUT<br />

INPUT ANA. Y<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

1<br />

2<br />

,,,,,<br />

,,,,,<br />

,,,,,<br />

1 - 4-wire cables with double shielding (4 x 0.22 mm 2 )<br />

2 - Bonding braid connected to the machine frame<br />

3 - Spindle <strong>and</strong> feed rate potentiometers<br />

Screening not compulsory<br />

See remark<br />

Protective earth<br />

Feed rate<br />

potentiometer<br />

1 kΩ<br />

1 kΩ<br />

Spindle<br />

potentiometer<br />

3<br />

Cables<br />

REMARK: If the interference level is low, the cables with double shielding can be replaced<br />

by cables with single shielding, with the shielding connected to the protective earth<br />

at both ends.<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 55<br />

7


7.4 Input <strong>and</strong> Output Cables<br />

7.4.1 32-Input Cable of the 64-48 I/O <strong>and</strong> 32-24 I/O Cards<br />

a b c<br />

Solder side<br />

7 - 56 en-938816/4<br />

15<br />

14<br />

13<br />

12<br />

11<br />

10<br />

9<br />

7<br />

6<br />

5<br />

4<br />

3<br />

2<br />

1<br />

1 - Connector (see 7.4.3 for cable customisation)<br />

2 - Input <strong>and</strong> external power supply wires<br />

REMARK Hole C7 is capped on the input cable connector.<br />

1<br />

2


Low part High part<br />

P24VE<br />

I 00.0<br />

I 00.1<br />

I 00.2<br />

I 00.3<br />

I 00.4<br />

I 00.5<br />

I 00.6<br />

I 00.7<br />

GND<br />

I 01.0<br />

I 01.1<br />

I 01.2<br />

I 01.3<br />

I 01.4<br />

I 01.5<br />

I 01.6<br />

I 01.7<br />

GND<br />

I 02.0<br />

I 02.1<br />

I 02.2<br />

I 02.3<br />

I 02.4<br />

I 02.5<br />

I 02.6<br />

I 02.7<br />

GND<br />

I 03.0<br />

I 03.1<br />

I 03.2<br />

I 03.3<br />

I 03.4<br />

I 03.5<br />

I 03.6<br />

I 03.7<br />

GND<br />

P24VE<br />

I 04.0<br />

I 04.1<br />

I 04.2<br />

I 04.3<br />

I 04.4<br />

I 04.5<br />

I 04.6<br />

I 04.7<br />

GND<br />

I 05.0<br />

I 05.1<br />

I 05.2<br />

I 05.3<br />

I 05.4<br />

I 05.5<br />

I 05.6<br />

I 05.7<br />

GND<br />

I 06.0<br />

I 06.1<br />

I 06.2<br />

I 06.3<br />

I 06.4<br />

I 06.5<br />

I 06.6<br />

I 06.7<br />

GND<br />

I 07.0<br />

I 07.1<br />

I 07.2<br />

I 07.3<br />

I 07.4<br />

I 07.5<br />

I 07.6<br />

I 07.7<br />

GND<br />

Contact<br />

a12<br />

a1<br />

c1<br />

b1<br />

c2<br />

b2<br />

c3<br />

b3<br />

c4<br />

a2<br />

b4<br />

c5<br />

b5<br />

c6<br />

b6<br />

b7<br />

a6<br />

a7<br />

a3<br />

a9<br />

c9<br />

b9<br />

c10<br />

b10<br />

c11<br />

b11<br />

c12<br />

a4<br />

b12<br />

c13<br />

b13<br />

c14<br />

b14<br />

c15<br />

b15<br />

a15<br />

a5<br />

REMARK All the commons are interconnected on the card.<br />

+<br />

-<br />

Cables<br />

24 VDC<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 57<br />

7


7.4.2 24-Output Cable of the 64-48 I/O <strong>and</strong> 32-24 I/O Cards<br />

a b c<br />

Solder side<br />

7 - 58 en-938816/4<br />

15<br />

14<br />

13<br />

12<br />

11<br />

10<br />

9<br />

7<br />

6<br />

5<br />

4<br />

3<br />

2<br />

1<br />

1 - Connector (see 7.4.3 for cable customisation)<br />

2 - Output <strong>and</strong> external power supply wires<br />

REMARK Hole C15 is capped on the output cable connector.<br />

1<br />

2


Low part High part<br />

P24VS<br />

O 00.0<br />

O 00.1<br />

O 00.2<br />

O 00.3<br />

O 00.4<br />

O 00.5<br />

O 00.6<br />

O 00.7<br />

GND<br />

P24VS<br />

O 01.0<br />

O 01.1<br />

O 01.2<br />

O 01.3<br />

O 01.4<br />

O 01.5<br />

O 01.6<br />

O 01.7<br />

GND<br />

P24VS<br />

O 02.0<br />

O 02.1<br />

O 02.2<br />

O 02.3<br />

O 02.4<br />

O 02.5<br />

O 02.6<br />

O 02.7<br />

GND<br />

GND<br />

P24VS<br />

P24VS<br />

O 03.0<br />

O 03.1<br />

O 03.2<br />

O 03.3<br />

O 03.4<br />

O 03.5<br />

O 03.6<br />

O 03.7<br />

GND<br />

P24VS<br />

O 04.0<br />

O 04.1<br />

O 04.2<br />

O 04.3<br />

O 04.4<br />

O 04.5<br />

O 04.6<br />

O 04.7<br />

GND<br />

P24VS<br />

O 05.0<br />

O 05.1<br />

O 05.2<br />

O 05.3<br />

O 05.4<br />

O 05.5<br />

O 05.6<br />

O 05.7<br />

GND<br />

GND<br />

P24VS<br />

Contact<br />

a2<br />

a1<br />

c1<br />

b1<br />

c2<br />

b2<br />

c3<br />

b3<br />

c4<br />

a9<br />

a3<br />

b4<br />

c5<br />

b5<br />

c6<br />

b6<br />

c7<br />

b7<br />

a7<br />

a10<br />

a4<br />

c9<br />

b9<br />

c10<br />

b10<br />

c11<br />

b11<br />

c12<br />

b12<br />

a11<br />

a12<br />

a5<br />

24 VDC<br />

Cables<br />

REMARK All the common wires are interconnected on the card as are all the P24VS power<br />

supply wires.<br />

+<br />

-<br />

en-938816/4 7 - 59<br />

7


7.4.3 Polarising <strong>and</strong> Customising the Cables of the 64-48 I/O <strong>and</strong> 32-24 I/O Cards<br />

7.4.3.1 Polarising the Input <strong>and</strong> Output Cables<br />

The input <strong>and</strong> output cables are differentiated:<br />

- by marking with the words "ENTREES" (inputs) or "SORTIES" (outputs),<br />

- by polarising:<br />

7 - 60 en-938816/5<br />

Input<br />

polarising<br />

Hole capped Hole capped<br />

Output<br />

polarising<br />

7.4.3.2 Customising the Cables of the High or Low Part<br />

The cables must be customised according as they occupy the high or low part of the connector:<br />

Protection<br />

To customise the cables, break off the tabs shown in black.<br />

High part<br />

Low part


Cables<br />

7.4.3.3 Installing <strong>and</strong> Locking the Cables<br />

Insert the connectors plugs in the receptacles taking the input/output polarising <strong>and</strong> top/bottom part into account:<br />

Lock the connectors in place with the tabs provided, inserting them until they snap into place:<br />

Removing a Connector<br />

Slightly separate the two tabs <strong>and</strong> pull out the connector, taking care not to break the tabs.<br />

Reinstalling a Connector<br />

Slightly separate the two tabs <strong>and</strong> push the connector home, taking care not to break the tabs.<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 61<br />

7


7.4.4 32-Input Cable (with or without general power supply of the inputs) for 32 I/24 O<br />

Card <strong>and</strong> Machine Panel Extension<br />

Solder side<br />

37<br />

20<br />

19<br />

1<br />

7 - 62 en-938816/5<br />

2<br />

1 - Input <strong>and</strong> external power supply wires<br />

2 - 37-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

1


I 00.0<br />

I 00.1<br />

I 00.2<br />

I 00.3<br />

I 00.4<br />

I 00.5<br />

I 00.6<br />

I 00.7<br />

COMMON<br />

I 01.0<br />

I 01.1<br />

I 01.2<br />

I 01.3<br />

I 01.4<br />

I 01.5<br />

I 01.6<br />

I 01.7<br />

COMMON<br />

I 02.0<br />

I 02.1<br />

I 02.2<br />

I 02.3<br />

I 02.4<br />

I 02.5<br />

I 02.6<br />

I 02.7<br />

COMMON<br />

I 03.0<br />

I 03.1<br />

I 03.2<br />

I 03.3<br />

I 03.4<br />

I 03.5<br />

I 03.6<br />

I 03.7<br />

COMMON<br />

24 VE<br />

1<br />

20<br />

2<br />

21<br />

3<br />

22<br />

4<br />

23<br />

5<br />

24<br />

6<br />

25<br />

7<br />

26<br />

8<br />

27<br />

9<br />

28<br />

29<br />

11<br />

30<br />

12<br />

31<br />

13<br />

32<br />

14<br />

33<br />

15<br />

34<br />

16<br />

35<br />

17<br />

36<br />

18<br />

37<br />

19<br />

10<br />

+<br />

-<br />

24 VDC<br />

Cables<br />

REMARKS Contact 10 is only connected when the 32-input cable provides the general power<br />

supply for the inputs (or machine panel extension).<br />

All the common wires are interconnected in the card.<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 63<br />

7


7.4.5 32 I / 24 O Card 24-Output Cable<br />

Solder side<br />

19<br />

1<br />

37<br />

20<br />

7 - 64 en-938816/5<br />

1 - 37-contact female Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Output wires <strong>and</strong> external power supply<br />

1<br />

2


24 VS.0 19<br />

O 00.0<br />

O 00.1<br />

O 00.2<br />

O 00.3<br />

O 00.4<br />

O 00.5<br />

COMMON<br />

O 00.6<br />

COMMON<br />

O 00.7<br />

O 01.0<br />

O 01.1<br />

O 01.2<br />

O 01.3<br />

O 01.4<br />

COMMON<br />

O 01.5<br />

O 01.6<br />

O 01.7<br />

O 02.0<br />

O 02.1<br />

O 02.2<br />

O 02.3<br />

O 02.4<br />

O 02.5<br />

O 02.6<br />

O 02.7<br />

24 VS.1<br />

COMMON<br />

37<br />

18<br />

36<br />

17<br />

35<br />

16<br />

34<br />

33<br />

14<br />

32<br />

13<br />

31<br />

12<br />

30<br />

28<br />

9<br />

8<br />

5<br />

7<br />

4<br />

25<br />

24<br />

20<br />

21<br />

22<br />

23<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

24 VDC<br />

+<br />

-<br />

24 VDC<br />

+<br />

-<br />

Cables<br />

REMARK The common wires of the first group of outputs (contacts 9, 14 <strong>and</strong> 34) are<br />

interconnected in the card.<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 65<br />

7


7.4.6 Machine Panel Extension 24-Output Cable (with or without external power<br />

supply)<br />

Solder side<br />

19<br />

1<br />

37<br />

20<br />

7 - 66 en-938816/5<br />

1 - 37-contact female Sub.D connector<br />

2 - Output (<strong>and</strong> external power supply) wires<br />

1<br />

2


24 VS.0 19<br />

O 00.0<br />

O 00.1<br />

O 00.2<br />

O 00.3<br />

O 00.4<br />

O 00.5<br />

COMMON<br />

O 00.6<br />

COMMON<br />

O 00.7<br />

O 01.0<br />

O 01.1<br />

O 01.2<br />

O 01.3<br />

O 01.4<br />

COMMON<br />

O 01.5<br />

O 01.6<br />

O 01.7<br />

O 02.0<br />

O 02.1<br />

O 02.2<br />

O 02.3<br />

O 02.4<br />

O 02.5<br />

O 02.6<br />

O 02.7<br />

24 VS.1<br />

COMMON<br />

37<br />

18<br />

36<br />

17<br />

35<br />

16<br />

34<br />

33<br />

14<br />

32<br />

13<br />

31<br />

12<br />

30<br />

28<br />

9<br />

8<br />

5<br />

7<br />

4<br />

25<br />

24<br />

20<br />

21<br />

22<br />

23<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

24 VDC<br />

Cables<br />

REMARKS The power supply wire is only connected when the 24-output cable provides the<br />

general power supply for the machine panel extension.<br />

In this case, the 24 VDC is connected to only one of pins 2 or 19.<br />

All the common wires are interconnected inside the machine panel extension.<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 67<br />

+<br />

-<br />

7


7.4.7 32-Input Cable with Trelec Connector<br />

Trelec 18-contact<br />

connectors<br />

+ locking system<br />

<strong>and</strong> polarising pins<br />

7 - 68 en-938816/5<br />

Old notation New notation<br />

COM 0<br />

IN 0<br />

IN 1<br />

IN 2<br />

IN 3<br />

IN 4<br />

IN 5<br />

IN 6<br />

IN 7<br />

LOCK<br />

IN 8<br />

IN 9<br />

IN A<br />

IN B<br />

IN C<br />

IN D<br />

IN E<br />

IN F<br />

COM 1<br />

COM 2<br />

IN 10<br />

IN 11<br />

IN 12<br />

IN 13<br />

IN 14<br />

IN 15<br />

IN 16<br />

IN 17<br />

LOCK<br />

IN 18<br />

IN 19<br />

IN 1A<br />

IN 1B<br />

IN 1C<br />

IN 1D<br />

IN 1E<br />

IN 1F<br />

COM 3<br />

COM 0<br />

I 00.0<br />

I 00.1<br />

I 00.2<br />

I 00.3<br />

I 00.4<br />

I 00.5<br />

I 00.6<br />

I 00.7<br />

LOCK<br />

I 01.0<br />

I 01.1<br />

I 01.2<br />

I 01.3<br />

I 01.4<br />

I 01.5<br />

I 01.6<br />

I 01.7<br />

COM 1<br />

COM 2<br />

I 02.0<br />

I 02.1<br />

I 02.2<br />

I 02.3<br />

I 02.4<br />

I 02.5<br />

I 02.6<br />

I 02.7<br />

LOCK<br />

I 03.0<br />

I 03.1<br />

I 03.2<br />

I 03.3<br />

I 03.4<br />

I 03.5<br />

I 03.6<br />

I 03.7<br />

COM 3<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

15<br />

16<br />

17<br />

18<br />

19<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

15<br />

16<br />

17<br />

18<br />

19<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

24 VDC<br />

24 VDC<br />

24 VDC<br />

24 VDC


7.4.8 32-Input Cable with LMI Connector<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

,,,<br />

LMI type connector plugs<br />

COM 0<br />

I 00.0<br />

I 00.1<br />

I 00.2<br />

I 00.3<br />

I 00.4<br />

I 00.5<br />

I 00.6<br />

I 00.7<br />

I 01.0<br />

I 01.1<br />

I 01.2<br />

I 01.3<br />

I 01.4<br />

I 01.5<br />

I 01.6<br />

I 01.7<br />

COM 1<br />

COM 2<br />

I 02.0<br />

I 02.1<br />

I 02.2<br />

I 02.3<br />

I 02.4<br />

I 02.5<br />

I 02.6<br />

I 02.7<br />

I 03.0<br />

I 03.1<br />

I 03.2<br />

I 03.3<br />

I 03.4<br />

I 03.5<br />

I 03.6<br />

I 03.7<br />

COM 3<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

15<br />

16<br />

17<br />

18<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

15<br />

16<br />

17<br />

18<br />

-<br />

24 VDC<br />

+<br />

+<br />

24 VDC<br />

-<br />

-<br />

24 VDC<br />

+<br />

+<br />

24 VDC<br />

-<br />

Cables<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 69<br />

7


7.4.9 32-Output Cable with Trelec Connector<br />

Trelec 18-contact<br />

connectors<br />

+ locking system<br />

7 - 70 en-938816/5<br />

Old notation<br />

OUT 0<br />

COM 0<br />

OUT 1<br />

COM 1<br />

OUT 2<br />

OUT 3<br />

OUT 4<br />

OUT 5<br />

OUT 6<br />

LOCK<br />

OUT 7<br />

OUT 8<br />

OUT 9<br />

OUT A<br />

OUT B<br />

OUT C<br />

OUT D<br />

OUT E<br />

OUT F<br />

COM 2<br />

OUT 10<br />

OUT 11<br />

OUT 12<br />

OUT 13<br />

OUT 14<br />

OUT 15<br />

OUT 16<br />

OUT 17<br />

LOCK<br />

OUT 18<br />

OUT 19<br />

OUT 1A<br />

OUT 1B<br />

OUT 1C<br />

OUT 1D<br />

OUT 1E<br />

OUT 1F<br />

COM 3<br />

New notation<br />

O 00.0<br />

COM 0<br />

O 00.1<br />

COM 1<br />

O 00.2<br />

O 00.3<br />

O 00.4<br />

O 00.5<br />

O 00.6<br />

LOCK<br />

O 00.7<br />

O 01.0<br />

O 01.1<br />

O 01.2<br />

O 01.3<br />

O 01.4<br />

O 01.5<br />

O 01.6<br />

O 01.7<br />

COM 2<br />

O 02.0<br />

O 02.1<br />

O 02.2<br />

O 02.3<br />

O 02.4<br />

O 02.5<br />

O 02.6<br />

O 02.7<br />

LOCK<br />

O 03.0<br />

O 03.1<br />

O 03.2<br />

O 03.3<br />

O 03.4<br />

O 03.5<br />

O 03.6<br />

O 03.7<br />

COM 3<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

15<br />

16<br />

17<br />

18<br />

19<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

15<br />

16<br />

17<br />

18<br />

19<br />

M<br />

M<br />

M<br />

24 VAC<br />

48 VAC<br />

110 VAC<br />

230 VAC<br />

M<br />

24 VDC<br />

48 VDC<br />

-<br />

+<br />

For use with AC voltage<br />

For use with DC voltage


7.4.10 32-Output Cable with LMI Connector<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

,,<br />

LMI type connector plugs<br />

O 00.0<br />

COM 0<br />

O 00.1<br />

O 00.2<br />

O 00.3<br />

O 00.4<br />

O 00.5<br />

O 00.6<br />

O 00.7<br />

O 01.0<br />

O 01.1<br />

O 01.2<br />

O 01.3<br />

O 01.4<br />

O 01.5<br />

O 01.6<br />

O 01.7<br />

COM A<br />

O 02.0<br />

O 02.1<br />

O 02.2<br />

O 02.3<br />

O 02.4<br />

O 02.5<br />

O 02.6<br />

O 02.7<br />

COM B<br />

O 03.0<br />

O 03.1<br />

O 03.2<br />

O 03.3<br />

O 03.4<br />

O 03.5<br />

O 03.6<br />

O 03.7<br />

COM B<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

15<br />

16<br />

17<br />

18<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

14<br />

15<br />

16<br />

17<br />

18<br />

M<br />

M<br />

24 VAC<br />

48 VAC<br />

110 VAC<br />

230 VAC<br />

M<br />

24 VDC<br />

48 VDC<br />

-<br />

+<br />

For use with AC voltage<br />

For use with DC voltage<br />

Cables<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 71<br />

7


7.5 Power Cables<br />

7.5.1 Power Cable<br />

A<br />

M<br />

1<br />

220 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

7 - 72 en-938816/5<br />

A<br />

B<br />

M<br />

B<br />

2<br />

1- Female mains plug<br />

2- 2 x 1.3 mm 2 shielded cable<br />

! CAUTION<br />

220 V<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed in<br />

accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.


7.5.2 32-Input/24-Output Card Input External Power Cable<br />

0 V<br />

24 V<br />

1<br />

1 - 2-contact Trelec cable<br />

2 - External power supply wires<br />

7.5.3 Machine Panel <strong>and</strong> Extension Power Cable<br />

Principle of connection of the two power cable wires:<br />

Wiring instructions:<br />

- open the terminal with screwdriver (1),<br />

- insert the wire (2),<br />

- release the screwdriver to clamp the wire.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

2<br />

, ,<br />

Terminal block<br />

Card<br />

, ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,<br />

Cables<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 73<br />

7<br />

, ,


7.5.4 NUM Diskette Drive Power Cable<br />

4<br />

7 - 74 en-938816/5<br />

A B C 1<br />

1 - 2-wire cable<br />

2 - 24 VDC power supply (limit values: 19.2-30 V), polarity unimportant<br />

3 - Jack insulator<br />

4 - Jack connector<br />

Wiring instructions:<br />

- Solder a wire to each of jack conductors (A)<br />

- Fold back the tabs onto the cable (B)<br />

- Insert the insulator up to the connector collar (C)<br />

3<br />

REMARK The drive must not be supplied via the jack when the remote serial line provides<br />

the power supply.<br />

2


7.5.5 50-Key LCD Panel Power Cable<br />

A<br />

1<br />

24 VDC<br />

+<br />

-<br />

A<br />

B<br />

B<br />

2<br />

1 - 3-contact connector with 2 male contacts to be crimped<br />

2 - Twisted-pair cable (2 x 1 mm 2 )<br />

24 VDC<br />

0 V<br />

Cables<br />

en-938816/5-E1 7 - 75<br />

7


7.6 Video Cable<br />

Solder side Solder side<br />

1 2 3<br />

37<br />

20<br />

19<br />

1<br />

7 - 76 en-938816/5<br />

1 - 37-contact male Sub.D connector plug<br />

2 - Video cable<br />

3 - 37-contact female Sub.D connector plug<br />

19<br />

1<br />

37<br />

20


Red (white wire)<br />

Red earth<br />

(black wire)<br />

Green (white wire)<br />

Green earth<br />

(black wire)<br />

Blue (white wire)<br />

Blue earth<br />

(black wire)<br />

H sync (white wire)<br />

H sync earth<br />

(black wire)<br />

V syn (white wire)<br />

V sync earth<br />

(black wire)<br />

Vcc<br />

Vcc<br />

GND<br />

GND<br />

TRANS 1<br />

TRANS 2<br />

RECEP 1<br />

RECEP 2<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

7<br />

Red<br />

7 Red (white wire)<br />

Red earth<br />

8<br />

8 (black wire)<br />

27<br />

Green<br />

27 Green (white wire)<br />

Green earth<br />

28<br />

28 (black wire)<br />

10<br />

11<br />

Blue<br />

10<br />

11<br />

Blue (white wire)<br />

Blue earth<br />

(black wire)<br />

30<br />

White<br />

30 H sync (white wire)<br />

H sync earth<br />

31<br />

31 (black wire)<br />

13<br />

Black<br />

13 V syn (white wire)<br />

V sync earth<br />

14<br />

14 (black wire)<br />

1<br />

Blue (0.6)<br />

1 Vcc<br />

2<br />

Red (0.6)<br />

2 Vcc<br />

20<br />

White (0.6)<br />

20 GND<br />

21<br />

Black (0.6)<br />

21 GND<br />

19<br />

Red (0.22)<br />

Red (0.22)<br />

37 RECEP 1<br />

18<br />

White (0.22)<br />

White (0.22)<br />

36 RECEP 2<br />

37<br />

Black (0.22)<br />

Black (0.22)<br />

19 TRANS 1<br />

36<br />

Blue (0.22)<br />

Blue (0.22)<br />

18 TRANS 2<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

Recommendations:<br />

- clamp the cable on a half-cover,<br />

- solder the pins opposite the half-cover,<br />

- clamp the other side of the cable on a half-cover,<br />

- solder the pins opposite the half-cover.<br />

CONNEC-<br />

TOR<br />

SHELL<br />

PROTECTIVE<br />

EARTH<br />

! CAUTION<br />

For correct interference suppression in the system, the cable shielding must be earthed<br />

(on 360 degrees) in accordance with the instructions of Sec. 1.4.4.2.<br />

The two clamps must be used to clamp the cable onto the cover.<br />

Cables<br />

en-938816/5 7 - 77<br />

7


7 - 78 en-938816/5


Part Two<br />

COMMISSIONING


Initial Conditions<br />

- Power components turned off.<br />

- Mains voltage 230 VAC.<br />

Actions<br />

Turn on the general power supply..<br />

Turn on the <strong>CN</strong>C (a reset is automatically executed).<br />

The current point page <strong>and</strong> the following status window are displayed on the main display page:<br />

HOME<br />

CONT M02<br />

Flashing<br />

INS<br />

CAPS<br />

Initial operation<br />

The "Halt" <strong>and</strong> "Def" LEDs on the processor cards are extinguished ("Halt" is lit to indicate a system fault <strong>and</strong> "Def"<br />

is lit to indicate a fault on the card).<br />

All the display pages must be accessible from the operator panel.<br />

Problems<br />

In the event of a malfunction:<br />

Reset the system (press the "RaZ" pushbutton on the power supply card<br />

of the main rack).<br />

8 Initial Operation<br />

en-938816/4 8 - 1<br />

8


8 - 2 en-938816/4


9.1 Load Procedures<br />

Load <strong>and</strong> Check of the PLC Programme<br />

9 Load <strong>and</strong> Check of the PLC Programme<br />

Ladder language is used to programme the automatic control function (see Automatic Control Function Programming<br />

Manual in Ladder Language).<br />

Programming <strong>and</strong> programme loading are carried out with PLCTOOL running on a PC or compatible.<br />

The programme coherence <strong>and</strong> consistency with the system configuration is checked using <strong>CN</strong>C utility 7 (UT7).<br />

9.2 Checking the PLC Programme: Test of the Safety Systems<br />

The safety systems <strong>and</strong> PLC programme are checked off load before turning on the power components.<br />

en-938816/5 9 - 1<br />

9


9 - 2 en-938816/5


See Parameter Manual.<br />

Integration of the machine parameters (by UT5)<br />

10 Integration of the Machine Parameters (by UT5)<br />

en-938816/4 10 - 1<br />

10


10 - 2 en-938816/4


Axis Calibration (by UT2)<br />

11 Axis Calibration (by UT2)<br />

11.1 General 11 - 3<br />

11.2 Record of Corrections to Be Made 11 - 5<br />

11.3 Operations on Axis Measurement Correction Tables 11 - 6<br />

11.3.1 Entering the Measurement Correction<br />

Table 11 - 7<br />

11.3.2 Saving the Measurement Correction Table 11 - 8<br />

11.3.3 Checking the Measurement Correction<br />

Table 11 - 9<br />

11.3.4 Loading a Measurement Correction<br />

Table 11 - 10<br />

11.3.5 Exit from the Utility Confirming the<br />

Changes Made 11 - 11<br />

en-938816/4 11 - 1<br />

11


11 - 2 en-938816/4


11.1 General<br />

Axis Calibration (by UT2)<br />

Axis calibration allows the system to add a correction depending on the real axis position to the measurement made<br />

by the coupler.<br />

INTERPOLATOR<br />

XR +<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+Xm<br />

COUPLER<br />

+<br />

+<br />

- Interaxis<br />

calibration<br />

- Dynamic<br />

operators<br />

CR<br />

ε<br />

P<br />

D.A.C.<br />

Motor<br />

-<br />

Cm<br />

Axis corrections<br />

Axis calibration is carried out on both linear <strong>and</strong> rotary axes.<br />

The corrections are entered for a limited number of points per axis. The system computes the corrections between<br />

two points by linear interpolation.<br />

Correction<br />

Point 26<br />

Interpolation<br />

. . . . .Point 25 Point 27. . . . .<br />

Axis measurement<br />

en-938816/4 11 - 3<br />

11


It is recommended to correct the measurements of the minimum <strong>and</strong> maximum travel points (defined by machine<br />

parameter P17). Otherwise, the value of the last correction is applied to these points:<br />

Minimum <strong>and</strong> maximum travel points not corrected<br />

Correction<br />

Minimum<br />

travel<br />

Minimum <strong>and</strong> maximum travel points corrected<br />

Correction<br />

Minimum<br />

travel<br />

11 - 4 en-938816/4<br />

0<br />

0<br />

Maximum<br />

travel<br />

Maximum<br />

travel<br />

Axis<br />

measurement<br />

Axis measurement<br />

A maximum number of approximately 2600 points can be corrected for all the axes combined. There are no restrictions<br />

on how the points are distributed on the axes.


11.2 Record of Corrections to Be Made<br />

The real axis position is taken for a series of points to determine the corrections required:<br />

OM<br />

P2<br />

P1<br />

POSIT/MACH TO GO ERROR<br />

X + 299.164 + 0. 0<br />

Y + 399.712 + 0. 0<br />

Z - 142.125 + 0. 0<br />

Axis Calibration (by UT2)<br />

The corrections are in the internal system unit or ten-thous<strong>and</strong>ths of a degree<br />

Axis number: Unit:<br />

Measured position<br />

(P1)<br />

Real position<br />

(P2)<br />

Correction<br />

(P2 - P1)<br />

The measured values <strong>and</strong> corresponding corrections are recorded in the correction tables (see 11.3.1).<br />

REMARKS A correction table must have at least three points.<br />

The correction range is between -32768 <strong>and</strong> +32768 units.<br />

For a rotary axis, the corrections must be identical for the 0 <strong>and</strong> 360 degree points.<br />

Y<br />

en-938816/4 11 - 5<br />

11


11.3 Operations on Axis Measurement Correction Tables<br />

Select the <strong>CN</strong> UTILITY menu.<br />

EXIT ☞<br />

Display of the "<strong>CN</strong> UTILITY" menu.<br />

Select the "UTILITIES PRESENT" menu. ☞<br />

Display of the "UTILITIES PRESENT" menu.<br />

@<br />

Select the axis calibration utility. ☞ 2<br />

Display of the menu:<br />

AXIS CABLIBRATION VALUES<br />

>0 DISPLAY - CHANGE<br />

1 LOAD<br />

2 UNLOAD<br />

3 VERIFY<br />

Select the operation to be performed:<br />

- enter a measurement correction table (see 11.3.1),<br />

- load a measurement correction table (see 11.3.4),<br />

- save a measurement correction table (see 11.3.2),<br />

- check the measurement correction table (see 11.3.3),<br />

- exit from the utility, confirming the data modified (see 11.3.5).<br />

11 - 6 en-938816/4<br />

)<br />

0


11.3.1 Entering the Measurement Correction Table<br />

Initial Conditions<br />

Record made of required corrections (see 11.2).<br />

"AXIS CALIBRATION VALUES" menu displayed.<br />

Actions<br />

Choose "DISPLAY - CHANGE" ☞<br />

Display of the question:<br />

AXIS ?<br />

Enter the number of the axis to be corrected (corresponds to the axis ☞<br />

position in machine parameter P9).<br />

Display of the measurement correction table for the axis considered, e.g.:<br />

AXIS CALIBRATION AXIS: 2<br />

>M- 10000 C- 3<br />

M- 9000 C+ 6<br />

M- 8000 C- 9<br />

...<br />

Axis Calibration (by UT2)<br />

Interpretation of the measurement correction table:<br />

- the header gives the axis number selected,<br />

- the next number, "M", is the measurement of the point (in microns or ten-thous<strong>and</strong>ths of a degree),<br />

- the following number, "C", is the correction to be made (in microns or ten-thous<strong>and</strong>ths of a degree).<br />

The table is in increasing order of measurements.<br />

When the table is empty, only the header is displayed.<br />

Modifying or Adding a Correction<br />

The corrections can be entered in any order.<br />

Enter the correction: "M±[measurement] C±[correction]". ☞<br />

Modification of the correction line concerned or display of the new line.<br />

Deleting a Correction<br />

Select the correction to be deleted. ☞<br />

Delete the correction. ☞ _<br />

Return to the "AXIS CALIBRATION VALUES" menu (to enter the corrections for another axis)<br />

EXIT<br />

Exit from the measurement correction table. ☞<br />

Return to the "AXIS CALIBRATION VALUES" menu.<br />

)<br />

0<br />

-<br />

➞<br />

en-938816/4 11 - 7<br />

11


11.3.2 Saving the Measurement Correction Table<br />

Initial conditions<br />

Peripheral device (PC + communication tool, diskette drive or tape reader/punch) connected <strong>and</strong> ready to receive data.<br />

"AXIS CALIBRATION VALUES" menu displayed.<br />

Actions<br />

@<br />

Select "UNLOAD". ☞ 2<br />

Display of the question:<br />

READY (Y/N)?<br />

Initiate the save. ☞ Y<br />

Display of :<br />

%[<strong>CN</strong>C job reference]<br />

Keep the job reference Change the job reference<br />

Possibly add a comment Enter another job reference<br />

(possibly with comment)<br />

Reinitiate the save. ☞<br />

The correction tables are saved then the following message is displayed:<br />

UPLOADING COMPLETE!<br />

Acknowledge the message. ☞<br />

Structure of the data transmitted<br />

The data saved are in the following format:<br />

%00084001 ;0A<br />

AXIS: 0;08<br />

M- 10000 C- 3;17<br />

M- 9000 C- 10;17<br />

...<br />

AXIS: 1;08<br />

M- 10000 C+ 25;17<br />

M- 9000 C- 5;17<br />

...<br />

!!<br />

Interpretation of the data transmitted:<br />

- the first line gives the <strong>CN</strong>C job reference (which may be followed by a comment, e.g.:."%00084001<br />

14 november 1995"),<br />

- each of the axes (AXIS: [No.]= is followed by the corrections assigned to it,<br />

- the number after "M" is the measurement of the point (in microns or ten-thous<strong>and</strong>ths of a degree),<br />

- the number after "C" is the correction of the point (in microns or ten-thous<strong>and</strong>ths of a degree),<br />

- the two digits after ";" on each line are the hexadecimal number of characters in the line.<br />

11 - 8 en-938816/4<br />

EXIT


11.3.3 Checking the Measurement Correction Table<br />

Axis Calibration (by UT2)<br />

The measurement correction table can be checked to make sure that it was saved or loaded correctly.<br />

Initial Conditions<br />

Peripheral (PC + communication tool, diskette drive or tape reader/punch) connected <strong>and</strong> ready to transmit the table<br />

to be checked.<br />

"AXIS CALIBRATION VALUES" menu displayed.<br />

Actions<br />

#<br />

Choose "VERIFY". ☞ 3<br />

Display of the question:<br />

READY (Y/N)?<br />

Initiate the check. ☞ Y<br />

Initiate transmission by the peripheral.<br />

The measurement correction table is checked followed by display of the message:<br />

OK!<br />

Acknowledge the message. ☞<br />

Possible Problems<br />

The job reference is different from the <strong>CN</strong>C job reference<br />

Loading stops <strong>and</strong> the incorrect job reference is displayed.<br />

Enter the correct job reference. ☞<br />

The check is then resumed <strong>and</strong> continues normally.<br />

The data saved do not correspond to the correction table<br />

Display of the message:<br />

ERROR<br />

Acknowledge the message. ☞<br />

Resume save (see 11.3.2) or load (see 11.3.4).<br />

The changes made to the measurement correction table were not confirmed before the check<br />

Display of the message:<br />

WARNING - CHANGES MAY BE LOST<br />

(EXIT TO SAVE)<br />

EXIT<br />

EXIT<br />

en-938816/4 11 - 9<br />

11


Acknowledge the message. ☞<br />

Confirm the modifications (see 11.3.5).<br />

Resume the check.<br />

11.3.4 Loading a Measurement Correction Table<br />

The measurement correction tables to be loaded can have two possible origins:<br />

- table saved earlier,<br />

- table entered on a peripheral device (complying with the structure shown in 11.3.2; the spaces before the numerical<br />

data can be omitted <strong>and</strong> the two digits after the ";" on each line are the number of characters in the line).<br />

Initial Conditions<br />

Peripheral device (PC + communication tool, diskette drive or tape reader/punch) connected <strong>and</strong> ready to transmit<br />

data.<br />

"AXIS CALIBRATION VALUES" menu displayed.<br />

Actions<br />

!<br />

Choose "LOAD". ☞ 1<br />

Display of the question:<br />

READY (Y/N)?<br />

Initiate the load. ☞ Y<br />

Initiate transmission by the peripheral.<br />

Load of the correction table.<br />

Possible Problems<br />

The job reference is different from the <strong>CN</strong>C job reference<br />

Loading stops <strong>and</strong> the incorrect job reference is displayed.<br />

Enter the correct job reference. ☞<br />

Loading is then resumed <strong>and</strong> continues normally.<br />

11 - 10 en-938816/4<br />

EXIT


11.3.5 Exit from the Utility Confirming the Changes Made<br />

Exit from the utility. ☞ CTRL<br />

Changes were made<br />

Display of the message:<br />

WRITING IN PROGRESS<br />

After confirmation, display of the message:<br />

WARNING ! LOADING REQUIRES TO STOP<br />

MACHINE CONTROL OK? (Y/N) :<br />

It is necessary to reset the system to take the changes made into account. ☞ Y<br />

Reset the system.<br />

No changes<br />

Return to the menu "UTILITIES PRESENT".<br />

Axis Calibration (by UT2)<br />

+ S<br />

X OFF<br />

en-938816/4 11 - 11<br />

11


11 - 12 en-938816/4


Interaxis Calibration<br />

12 Interaxis Calibration<br />

12.1 General Description of Interaxis Calibration 12 - 3<br />

12.1.1 General 12 - 3<br />

12.1.2 Examples of Interaxis Calibration 12 - 4<br />

12.1.3 Tools Used for Interaxis Calibration 12 - 6<br />

12.1.4 Measurement of the Corrections on the<br />

Axes 12 - 6<br />

12.2 Interaxis Calibration by Utility 20 12 - 7<br />

12.2.1 Entering the Measurement Correction<br />

Table for an Axis 12 - 8<br />

12.2.2 Saving the Measurement Correction Table 12 - 9<br />

12.2.3 Checking the Measurement Correction<br />

Table 12 - 10<br />

12.2.4 Loading a Measurement Correction Table 12 - 11<br />

12.2.5 Exit from the Utility Confirming the<br />

Changes Made 12 - 12<br />

12.3 Dynamic Interaxis Calibration 12 - 13<br />

12.3.1 Addresses of the Correction Parameters 12 - 13<br />

12.3.2 Correction Tables 12 - 13<br />

12.3.3 Writing <strong>and</strong> Enabling the Correction<br />

Tables 12 - 15<br />

12.3.3.1 Conditions for Writing Parameters E81xxx<br />

<strong>and</strong> E82xxx 12 - 15<br />

12.3.3.2 Conditions for Writing Parameters E940xx 12 - 15<br />

12.3.3.3 Procedure for Writing <strong>and</strong> Enabling the<br />

Correction Tables 12 - 15<br />

en-938816/4 12 - 1<br />

12


12 - 2 en-938816/4


12.1 General Description of Interaxis Calibration<br />

12.1.1 General<br />

Interaxis Calibration<br />

Interaxis calibration allows the system to add an offset to the normal reference of an interpolator depending on the<br />

position of another axis.<br />

The control axis is called the master axis <strong>and</strong> the corrected axis is the slave axis.<br />

INTERPOLATOR<br />

XR +<br />

+<br />

+ - +Xm<br />

COUPLER<br />

+<br />

+<br />

- Dynamic interaxis<br />

calibration<br />

- Dynamic operators<br />

CR<br />

εp<br />

D.A.C.<br />

Motor<br />

Interaxis calibration<br />

by utility 20<br />

Cm Axis corrections<br />

The corrections concern both linear <strong>and</strong> rotary axes.<br />

They are entered for a limited number of points per axis. The system computes the corrections between two points<br />

by linear interpolation.<br />

Beyond the end points, the corrections are constant.<br />

Correction on the salve axis<br />

First point<br />

corrected<br />

Special case: Correction in a single point<br />

Correction on the slave axis<br />

Single point<br />

corrected<br />

Last point<br />

corrected<br />

Master axis<br />

Master axis<br />

en-938816/4 12 - 3<br />

12


12.1.2 Examples of Interaxis Calibration<br />

REMARK The deformations are exaggerated for clarity in the examples below.<br />

Correction of a perpendicular alignment fault<br />

12 - 4 en-938816/4<br />

Theoretical X<br />

Z corrected according to the position on the X axis.<br />

Correction of bending of a boring bar<br />

Z<br />

X corrected according to extension of the boring bar<br />

Real X<br />

Z<br />

X


Correction of sag of the cross member of a gantry machine<br />

Z<br />

Z<br />

Sag in Z corrected according to the position on the X axis.<br />

Interaxis Calibration<br />

Expansion take-up on an axis<br />

An axis can be self-corrected (only with dynamic calibration, master axis aligned with slave axis) to cater for thermal<br />

expansion.<br />

The correction tables can be written by the PLC programme according to the measured temperatures then used by<br />

the system.<br />

The use of these corrections may prove difficult because of the thermal inertia of the machines.<br />

X<br />

X<br />

en-938816/4 12 - 5<br />

12


12.1.3 Tools Used for Interaxis Calibration<br />

Two tools can be used for interaxis calibration:<br />

- calibration by utility 20 (see 12.2) to make unvariable corrections to take into account deformations of the machine,<br />

- dynamic calibration by parameters E81xxx <strong>and</strong> E82xxx (see 12.3) that can be modified at any time (by the PLC<br />

programme or the part programme). These corrections are suited to variables that change over time such as<br />

thermal expansion.<br />

12.1.4 Measurement of the Corrections on the Axes<br />

The corrections to be made to the slave axis are measured for a series of reference positions on the master axis.<br />

Slave axis<br />

The corrections are made in the internal system unit or one-thous<strong>and</strong>ths of a degree.<br />

Master axis No.: Slave axis No.:<br />

Master axis position<br />

Unit:<br />

Slave axis correction<br />

Unit:<br />

The values measured are recorded in the correction tables (see 12.2.1 <strong>and</strong> 12.3.3).<br />

12 - 6 en-938816/4<br />

Master axis<br />

REMARKS For interaxis calibration by utility 20, the maximum corrections are + 9999 units.<br />

For dynamic interaxis calibration, the maximum difference between two consecutive<br />

corrections is + 65,000 units.


12.2 Interaxis Calibration by Utility 20<br />

A slave axis can have only one master axis.<br />

A master axis can have several slave axes.<br />

An axis cannot be its own slave (contrary to dynamic calibration).<br />

Actions<br />

Select the "<strong>CN</strong> UTILITY" menu. ☞<br />

Display of the "<strong>CN</strong> UTILITY" menu.<br />

Select the "UTILITIES PRESENT" menu. ☞<br />

Display of the "UTILITIES PRESENT" menu.<br />

Select the interaxis calibration utility. ☞ @<br />

2<br />

Display of the menu:<br />

INTER-AXIS CALIBRATION VALUES<br />

>0 DISPLAY- CHANGE<br />

1 LOAD<br />

2 UNLOAD<br />

3 VERIFY<br />

Select the operation to be performed:<br />

- enter a measurement correction table (see 12.2.1),<br />

- load a measurement correction table (see 12.2.4),<br />

- save a measurement correction table (see 12.2.2),<br />

- check the measurement correction table (see 12.2.3),<br />

- exit from the utility, confirming the data modified (see 12.2.5).<br />

)<br />

0<br />

EXIT<br />

Interaxis Calibration<br />

)<br />

0<br />

en-938816/4 12 - 7<br />

12


12.2.1 Entering the Measurement Correction Table for an Axis<br />

Initial Conditions<br />

Record made of required corrections (see 12.1.4).<br />

"INTER-AXIS CALIBRATION VALUES" menu displayed.<br />

Actions<br />

Choose "DISPLAY - CHANGE" ☞<br />

Display of the question:<br />

AXIS ?<br />

Enter "[slave axis No.], [master axis No.]" (the numbers correspond ☞<br />

to the axis positions in machine parameter P9).<br />

Display of the measurement correction table for the axis considered, e.g.:<br />

SLAVE AXIS: 0, MASTER AXIS: 2<br />

>M- 10000 C- 1<br />

M- 9000 C+ 1<br />

M- 8000 C+ 4<br />

...<br />

Interpretation of the measurement correction table:<br />

- the header gives the slave axis number followed by the master axis number,<br />

- the next number, "M", is the measurement of a point on the master axis (en micromètre ou dix millième de degré),<br />

- the following number, "C", is the correction made to the slave axis (en micromètre ou dix millième de degré).<br />

The table is in increasing order of measurements.<br />

When the table is empty, only the header is displayed.<br />

Modifying or Adding a Correction<br />

The corrections can be entered in any order.<br />

Enter the correction: "M±[measurement] C±[correction]". ☞<br />

Modification of the correction line concerned or display of the new line.<br />

Deleting a Correction<br />

Select the correction to be deleted. ☞<br />

Delete the correction. ☞ _<br />

Return to the "INTER-AXIS CALIBRATION VALUES" menu (to enter the corrections for another axis)<br />

EXIT<br />

Exit from the measurement correction table for axis pair. ☞<br />

Return to the "INTER-AXIS CALIBRATION VALUES" menu.<br />

12 - 8 en-938816/4<br />

)<br />

0<br />

-<br />


12.2.2 Saving the Measurement Correction Table<br />

Interaxis Calibration<br />

Initial conditions<br />

Peripheral device (PC + communication tool, diskette drive or tape reader/punch) connected <strong>and</strong> ready to receive data.<br />

"INTER-AXIS CALIBRATION VALUES" menu displayed.<br />

Actions<br />

@<br />

Select "UNLOAD". ☞ 2<br />

Display of the question:<br />

READY (Y/N)?<br />

Initiate the save. ☞ Y<br />

Display of :<br />

%[<strong>CN</strong>C job reference]<br />

Keep the job reference Change the job reference<br />

Possibly add a comment Enter another job reference<br />

(possibly with comment)<br />

Reinitiate the save. ☞<br />

The correction tables are saved then the following message is displayed:<br />

UPLOADING COMPLETE!<br />

Acknowledge the message. ☞<br />

Structure of the data transmitted<br />

The data saved are in the following format:<br />

%00084001 ;0A<br />

AXIS: 0, 1;0B<br />

M- 10000 C- 2;17<br />

M- 9000 C+ 1;17<br />

...<br />

AXIS: 2, 1;0B<br />

M- 10000 C+ 8;17<br />

M- 9000 C+ 5;17<br />

...<br />

!!<br />

Interpretation of the data transmitted:<br />

- the first line gives the <strong>CN</strong>C job reference (which may be followed by a comment, e.g.:."%00084001<br />

18 May 1994"),<br />

- each of the axis pairs (AXIS: [slave], [master]) is followed by the corrections assigned to it,<br />

- the next number, "M", is the dimension of a point on the master axis (in microns or ten-thous<strong>and</strong>ths of a degree),<br />

- the following number, "C", is the correction made to the slave axis (in microns or ten-thous<strong>and</strong>ths of a degree),<br />

- the two digits after ";" on each line are the hexadecimal number of characters in the line.<br />

EXIT<br />

en-938816/4 12 - 9<br />

12


12.2.3 Checking the Measurement Correction Table<br />

The measurement correction table can be checked to make sure that it was saved or loaded correctly.<br />

Initial Conditions<br />

Peripheral (PC + communication tool, diskette drive or tape reader/punch) connected <strong>and</strong> ready to transmit the table<br />

to be checked.<br />

"INTER-AXIS CALIBRATION VALUES" menu displayed.<br />

Actions<br />

#<br />

Choose "CHECK". ☞ 3<br />

Display of the question:<br />

READY (Y/N)?<br />

Initiate the check. ☞ Y<br />

Initiate transmission by the peripheral.<br />

The measurement correction table is checked followed by display of the message:<br />

OK<br />

Acknowledge the message. ☞<br />

Possible Problems<br />

The job reference is different from the <strong>CN</strong>C job reference<br />

Loading stops <strong>and</strong> the incorrect job reference is displayed.<br />

Enter the correct job reference. ☞<br />

The check is then resumed <strong>and</strong> continues normally.<br />

The data saved do not correspond to the correction table<br />

Display of the message:<br />

INCORRECT TAPE<br />

Acknowledge the message. ☞<br />

Resume save (see 12.2.2) or load (see 12.2.4).<br />

The changes made to the measurement correction table were not confirmed before the check<br />

Display of the message:<br />

WARNING - CHANGES MAY BE LOST<br />

(EXIT TO SAVE)<br />

EXIT<br />

Acknowledge the message. ☞<br />

12 - 10 en-938816/4<br />

EXIT<br />

EXIT


Confirm the modifications (see 12.2.5).<br />

Resume the check.<br />

12.2.4 Loading a Measurement Correction Table<br />

Interaxis Calibration<br />

The measurement correction tables to be loaded can have two possible origins:<br />

- table saved earlier,<br />

- table entered on a peripheral device (complying with the structure shown in 12.2.2; the spaces before the numerical<br />

data can be omitted <strong>and</strong> the two digits after the ";" on each line are the number of characters in the line).<br />

Initial Conditions<br />

Peripheral device (PC + communication tool, diskette drive or tape reader/punch) connected <strong>and</strong> ready to transmit<br />

data.<br />

"AXIS CALIBRATION VALUES" menu displayed.<br />

Actions<br />

!<br />

Choose "LOAD". ☞ 1<br />

Display of the question:<br />

READY (Y/N)?<br />

Initiate the load. ☞ Y<br />

Initiate transmission by the peripheral.<br />

Read of the correction table.<br />

Possible Problems<br />

The job reference is different from the <strong>CN</strong>C job reference<br />

Loading stops <strong>and</strong> the incorrect job reference is displayed.<br />

Enter the correct job reference. ☞<br />

Loading is then resumed <strong>and</strong> continues normally.<br />

en-938816/4 12 - 11<br />

12


12.2.5 Exit from the Utility Confirming the Changes Made<br />

Exit from the utility. ☞ CTRL<br />

Changes were made<br />

Display of the message:<br />

WRITING IN PROGRESS<br />

After confirmation, display of the message:<br />

WARNING ! LOADING REQUIRES TO STOP<br />

MACHINE CONTROL OK? (Y/N) :<br />

It is necessary to reset the system to take the changes made into account. ☞ Y<br />

Reset the system.<br />

No changes<br />

Return to the menu "UTILITIES PRESENT".<br />

12 - 12 en-938816/4<br />

+ S<br />

X OFF


12.3 Dynamic Interaxis Calibration<br />

12.3.1 Addresses of the Correction Parameters<br />

The corrections are made using parameters E81xxx, E82xxx <strong>and</strong> E94xxx:<br />

- parameters E81xxx address the master axis reference positions,<br />

- parameters E82xxx address the corresponding corrections on the slave axes,<br />

- parameters E94xxx assign a master axis to a slave axis.<br />

The current slave axis correction is accessible in read-only parameters E950xx.<br />

Interaxis Calibration<br />

12.3.2 Correction Tables<br />

The size of the correction tables (number of parameters E81xxx <strong>and</strong> parameters E82xxx) is defined by machine<br />

parameter P58 (See Parameters Manual). The maximum size of the correction tables is 1000 parameters E81xxx<br />

<strong>and</strong> 1000 parameters E82xxx.<br />

The correction tables can be schematically represented as follows:<br />

E81000<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

n<br />

E81a<br />

E81b<br />

E81c<br />

E81d<br />

a<br />

c<br />

E82a<br />

E82b<br />

E82c<br />

E82d<br />

b<br />

d<br />

0-n: SLAVE AXIS<br />

NUMBERS<br />

AXIS 0 CORRECTIONS<br />

AXIS 2 CORRECTIONS<br />

The first 32 parameters E81xxx <strong>and</strong> E82xxx are each assigned to the axis with the same number: E81003 <strong>and</strong> E82003<br />

are assigned to axis 3. They define the limits of the correction table assigned to the axis.<br />

The following parameters included in the table of corrections assigned to an axis define:<br />

- the reference position on the master axis (parameters E81xxx),<br />

- the corresponding correction applied to the slave axis (parameters E82xxx).<br />

en-938816/4 12 - 13<br />

12


The reference positions <strong>and</strong> slave axis corrections are signed values in internal system units.<br />

A master axis is assigned to a slave axis by E940xx = yy where:<br />

- xx is the slave axis number,<br />

- yy is the corresponding master axis number.<br />

E940xx = -1 means that no master axis is assigned to slave axis xx.<br />

Specifically<br />

For a corrected axis, the reference positions on the master axis must be defined in increasing order.<br />

Any unused location in the correction table can be used as extra E80xxx parameters (local data written <strong>and</strong> read by<br />

the <strong>CN</strong>C).<br />

Example<br />

12 - 14 en-938816/4<br />

E94003 = 1<br />

E81000<br />

"<br />

E81003<br />

E81004<br />

"<br />

"<br />

E81110<br />

"<br />

"<br />

"<br />

E81150<br />

110<br />

-300000<br />

-200000<br />

-100000<br />

0<br />

E82000<br />

"<br />

E82003<br />

E82004<br />

"<br />

"<br />

E82110<br />

"<br />

"<br />

"<br />

E82150<br />

150<br />

100<br />

500<br />

1200<br />

3500<br />

E94003 = 1 means that master axis 1 is assigned to slave axis 3.<br />

E81003 = 110 <strong>and</strong> E82003 = 150 mean that the parameters defining the corrections of axis 3 are between E81110<br />

<strong>and</strong> E81150 for the reference positions on master axis 1 <strong>and</strong> between E82110 <strong>and</strong> E82150 for the corresponding<br />

corrections made to slave axis 3.<br />

E81110 = -300000 <strong>and</strong> E82110 = 100 means that the first reference position on master axis 1 is located at -300000 μm,<br />

i.e. -300 mm <strong>and</strong> that the corresponding correction on slave axis 3 is 100 μm (if the internal system unit is micrometres).


12.3.3 Writing <strong>and</strong> Enabling the Correction Tables<br />

Parameters E81xxx, E82xxx <strong>and</strong> E940xx can be written by the PLC programme or a part programme.<br />

12.3.3.1 Conditions for Writing Parameters E81xxx <strong>and</strong> E82xxx<br />

Interaxis Calibration<br />

At least one E940xx parameter is different from -1<br />

This means that there is at least one master axis.<br />

The parameters defining the limits of the correction tables cannot be modified.<br />

The parameters defining the reference points cannot be modified.<br />

The corrections can be modified providing the difference between the two values is less than 100 mm.<br />

All E940xx parameters are equal to -1<br />

This means that no correction table is enabled.<br />

All E81xxx <strong>and</strong> E82xxx parameters can be modified without restriction.<br />

12.3.3.2 Conditions for Writing Parameters E940xx<br />

To change the master axis, it is first necessary to disable the correction linkage (parameter = -1). For instance, the<br />

following steps are necessary to change from master axis 3 to master axis 1 for slave axis 2:<br />

- E94002 = -1,<br />

- E94002 = 1.<br />

An axis can be slaved to its own reference, e.g. E94002 = 2.<br />

Checks are made on the correction table when writing parameter E94000: table limits, master axis reference points<br />

in increasing order, maximum difference between two consecutive corrections. The parameter is not enabled if the<br />

checks are not satisfied.<br />

12.3.3.3 Procedure for Writing <strong>and</strong> Enabling the Correction Tables<br />

The conditions for writing parameters E81xxx, E82xxx <strong>and</strong> E940xx determine the logical order for writing the correction<br />

tables:<br />

- cancel enabling of all the correction tables: E940xx = -1,<br />

- modify parameters E81xxx <strong>and</strong> E82xxx,<br />

- assign master axes to the slave axes: E940xx = yy.<br />

Writing of the Correction Tables by a Processor<br />

The parameters can be written:<br />

- during the timeout on a reset (data S_RAZ = 1),<br />

- during execution of a program, while a character string is being transmitted to the processor (logical address<br />

$0430).<br />

In a multiple axis group system, the enabled axis groups other than the one making the transfer must be on wait<br />

(G78 Pxx).<br />

Writing of the Correction Tables by a Part Programme<br />

The possibility of writing of the correction tables by a part programme is conditioned by machine parameter P7 (see<br />

Parameters Manual):<br />

- bit 5 of word 0 of P7 = 0: write by part programme enabled,<br />

- bit 5 of word 0 of P7 = 1: write by part programme inhibited.<br />

en-938816/4 12 - 15<br />

12


12 - 16 en-938816/4


13 Final Inspection<br />

A final inspection is made by machining a reference part (e.g. NASA part) to check that the <strong>CN</strong>C has been correctly<br />

configured for the machine (in particular by making the corrections on the axes).<br />

en-938816/4 13 - 1<br />

13


13 - 2 en-938816/4

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!